Sony DVD Recorder RDR HXD1065 User Manual

2-895-172-11(1)  
DVD Recorder  
Operating Instructions  
To find out useful hints, tips and information about Sony products and  
services please visit: www.sony-europe.com/myproduct  
RDR-HXD1065  
© 2006 Sony Corporation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Do not attempt to replace or  
upgrade the hard disk by  
yourself, as this may result in  
malfunction.  
On placement  
• Place the recorder in a location  
with adequate ventilation to  
prevent heat build-up in the  
recorder.  
Precautions  
This equipment has been tested  
and found to comply with the  
limits set out in the EMC  
Directive using a connection  
cable shorter than 3 metres.  
If the hard disk drive should  
malfunction, you cannot recover  
lost data. The hard disk drive is  
only a temporary storage space.  
• Do not place the recorder on a  
soft surface such as a rug that  
might block the ventilation  
holes.  
• Do not place the recorder in a  
confined space such as a  
bookshelf or similar unit.  
• Do not place the recorder in a  
location near heat sources, or  
in a place subject to direct  
sunlight, excessive dust, or  
mechanical shock.  
About repairing the hard  
disk drive  
On safety  
Should any solid object or liquid  
fall into the cabinet, unplug the  
recorder and have it checked by  
qualified personnel before  
operating it any further.  
• The contents of the hard disk  
drive may be checked in case  
of repair or inspection during a  
malfunction or modification.  
However, the contents will not  
be backed up or saved by  
Sony.  
About the hard disk drive  
The hard disk has a high storage  
density, which enables long  
recording durations and quick  
access to the written data.  
However, it can easily be  
damaged by shock, vibration or  
dust, and should be kept away  
from magnets. To avoid losing  
important data, observe the  
following precautions.  
• Do not apply a strong shock to  
the recorder.  
• Do not place the recorder in a  
location subject to mechanical  
vibrations or in an unstable  
location.  
• Do not place the recorder on  
top of a hot surface, such as a  
VCR or amplifier (receiver).  
• Do not use the recorder in a  
place subject to extreme  
changes in temperature  
(temperature gradient less than  
10 °C/hour).  
• Do not move the recorder with  
its mains lead connected.  
• Do not disconnect the mains  
lead while the power is on.  
• When disconnecting the mains  
lead, turn off the power and  
make sure that the hard disk  
drive is not operating (the  
clock is displayed in the front  
panel display for at least 30  
seconds and all recording or  
dubbing has stopped).  
• Do not place the recorder in an  
inclined position. It is  
• If the hard disk needs to be  
formatted or replaced, it will  
be done at the discretion of  
Sony. All contents of the hard  
disk drive will be erased,  
including contents that violate  
copyright laws.  
designed to be operated in a  
horizontal position only.  
• Keep the recorder and discs  
away from equipment with  
strong magnets, such as  
microwave ovens, or large  
loudspeakers.  
• Do not place heavy objects on  
the recorder.  
On power sources  
• The recorder is not  
disconnected from the AC  
power source (mains) as long  
as it is connected to the wall  
outlet, even if the recorder  
itself has been turned off.  
• If you are not going to use the  
recorder for a long time, be  
sure to disconnect the recorder  
from the wall outlet. To  
On recording  
Make trial recordings before  
making the actual recording.  
On compensation for lost  
recordings  
Sony is not liable and will not  
compensate for any lost  
recordings or relevant losses,  
including when recordings are  
not made due to reasons  
including recorder failure, or  
when the contents of a recording  
are lost or damaged as a result of  
recorder failure or repair  
undertaken to the recorder. Sony  
will not restore, recover, or  
replicate the recorded contents  
under any circumstances.  
disconnect the AC power cord  
(mains lead), grasp the plug  
itself; never pull the cord.  
• Do not move the recorder for  
one minute after you have  
unplugged the mains lead.  
,continued  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copyrights  
Copy guard function  
About this manual  
• Television programmes, films,  
video tapes, discs, and other  
materials may be copyrighted.  
Unauthorized recording of  
such material may be contrary  
to the provisions of the  
Since the recorder has a copy  
guard function, programmes  
received through an external  
tuner (not supplied) may contain  
copy protection signals (copy  
guard function) and as such may  
not be recordable, depending on  
the type of signal.  
• In this manual, the internal  
hard disk drive is written as  
“HDD,” and “disc” is used as a  
general reference for the HDD,  
DVDs, or CDs unless  
otherwise specified by the text  
or illustrations.  
copyright laws. Also, use of  
this recorder with cable  
• Icons, such as  
, listed  
DVD  
television transmission may  
require authorization from the  
cable television transmitter  
and/or programme owner.  
• This product incorporates  
copyright protection  
technology that is protected by  
U.S. patents and other  
intellectual property rights.  
Use of this copyright  
protection technology must be  
authorized by Macrovision,  
and is intended for home and  
other limited viewing uses  
only unless otherwise  
authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or  
disassembly is prohibited.  
at the top of each explanation  
indicate what kind of media  
can be used with the function  
being explained.  
• Instructions in this manual  
describe the controls on the  
remote. You can also use the  
controls on the recorder if they  
have the same or similar  
names as those on the remote.  
• The on-screen display  
IMPORTANT NOTICE  
Caution: This recorder is  
capable of holding a still  
video image or on-screen  
display image on your  
television screen  
indefinitely. If you leave the  
still video image or on-  
screen display image  
displayed on your TV for an  
extended period of time you  
risk permanent damage to  
your television screen.  
Plasma display panels and  
projection televisions are  
especially susceptible to this.  
illustrations used in this  
manual may not match the  
graphics displayed on your TV  
screen.  
• The explanations regarding  
DVDs in this manual refer to  
DVDs created on thisrecorder.  
The explanations do not apply  
to DVDs that are created on  
other recorders and played  
back on this recorder.  
If you have any questions or  
problems concerning your  
recorder, please consult your  
nearest Sony dealer.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
If you have a Sony DVD player or more than one Sony DVD  
®
(Analogue Mode only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Connecting a PAY-TV/Canal Plus Analogue Decoder  
,continued  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Finalising the disc using Z (open/close) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing from the beginning of the programme you are recording  
(Chasing Playback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Playing a previous recording while making another  
(Simultaneous Rec and Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
,continued  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing (HDD y DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
(HDD y DATA DVDs/HDD T DATA CDs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Copying JPEG image files (HDD y HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Aerial Reception and Language Settings (Basic)  
(Analogue Mode only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
MP3 audio tracks, JPEG image files, or DivX video files that the recorder  
can play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Guide to Disc Types  
Recordable and playable discs for video  
Icon used in Formatting  
this manual (new discs)  
Compatibility with other DVD  
players (finalising)  
Type  
Disc Logo  
Hard disk drive  
(internal)  
Formatting  
unnecessary  
Dub HDD contents to a DVD  
to play on other DVD players  
HDD  
Automatically  
formatted in  
+VR mode  
(DVD+RW  
VIDEO)  
Playable on DVD+RW  
compatible players  
(automatically finalised)  
DVD+RW  
+
RW  
Playable only on VR mode  
compatible players  
(finalisation unnecessary)  
VR  
mode  
Format in VR  
-
RWVR  
DVD-  
RW  
Format in  
Video mode  
Playable on most DVD  
players (finalisation  
Video  
mode  
-
RWVideo  
DVD+R  
Automatically  
formatted in  
+VR mode  
(DVD+R  
Playable on most DVD  
players (finalisation  
+
R
VIDEO)  
DVD+R DL  
Format in VR  
mode  
*1  
Playable only on DVD-R in  
VR mode compatible players  
(finalisation necessary)  
VR  
mode  
Formatting is  
performed  
-
RVR  
using the “Disc (page 44)  
Information”  
DVD-R  
display.  
Automatically Playable on most DVD  
Video  
mode  
formatted in  
Video mode  
players (finalisation  
-
RVideo  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Recordable and playable discs for JPEG image files  
Icon used in Formatting  
this manual (new discs)  
Compatibilitywith other DVD  
players (finalising)  
Type  
Disc Logo  
Copying JPEG image files to  
a DATA DVD to view or  
copy on other DVD players  
that JPEG image files can be  
played  
Hard disk drive  
(internal)  
Formatting  
unnecessary  
HDD  
Playable JPEG image files on  
DVD players that JPEG  
image files can be played  
(finalisation necessary  
depending on a disc)  
Format in  
DATA DVD  
DATA DVD  
DATA DVD  
Usable disc versions (as of November  
2006)  
Discs that cannot be recorded on  
• 8 cm discs  
• DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs  
• DVD-RAMs  
• 8x-speed or slower DVD+RWs  
• 6x-speed or slower DVD-RWs (Ver.1.1,  
*2  
Ver.1.2 with CPRM  
)
• 16x-speed or slower DVD+Rs  
• 16x-speed or slower DVD-Rs (Ver.2.0,  
*2  
Ver.2.1 with CPRM  
)
• 8x-speed or slower DVD+R DL (Double  
Layer) discs  
“DVD+RW,” “DVD-RW,” “DVD+R,” “DVD+R  
DL,” and “DVD-R” are trademarks.  
*1  
When an unformatted DVD-R is inserted into  
this recorder, it is automatically formatted in  
Video mode. To format a new DVD-R in VR  
mode, format using the “Disc Information”  
display (page 35).  
*2  
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable  
Media) is a coding technology that protects  
copyrights for images.  
,continued  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playable discs  
Icon used in  
this manual  
Type  
Disc Logo  
Characteristics  
Discs such as movies that can be  
purchased or rented  
This recorder also recognises DVD-  
RAMs and DVD-R Dual Layer (Video  
mode) discs as DVD Video compatible  
discs. If the DVD-RAM has a  
removable cartridge, remove the  
cartridge before playback.  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD  
VIDEO CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in  
VIDEO CD/Super VIDEO CD format  
VIDEO CD  
CD  
VCD  
CD  
Music CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in  
music CD format  
DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs/DVD-ROMs containing MP3  
audio tracks, JPEG image files or DivX  
video files  
DATA DVD  
DATA CD  
DATA DVD  
CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs  
containing either MP3 audio tracks,  
JPEG image files or DivX video files  
DATA CD  
8 cm DVD+RW, DVD-RW, and  
DVD-R recorded with a DVD video  
camera  
8 cm DVD+RW/  
DVD-RW/DVD-R  
“DVD VIDEO” and “CD” are trademarks.  
• DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/  
DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs that do not contain  
DVD Video, DivX video, JPEG image  
files, or MP3 audio tracks.  
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are  
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under  
license.  
• DVD Audio discs  
®
DivX is a video file compression technology,  
• Cartridge-only type DVD-RAMs and/or  
DVD-RAMs that do not contain DVD  
Video.  
• HD layer on Super Audio CDs  
• DVD VIDEOs with a different region code  
(page 13).  
developed by DivX, Inc.  
Discs that cannot be played  
• PHOTO CDs  
• CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs that are  
recorded in a format different from the  
formats mentioned in the table above.  
• Data part of CD-Extras  
• BDs  
• DVDs that were recorded on a different  
recorder and not correctly finalised.  
• HD DVDs  
• Discs recorded with an AVCHD-  
compatible DVD video camera  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maximum recordable number of titles  
Note on DualDiscs  
A DualDisc is a two sided disc product which  
mates DVD recorded material on one side  
with digital audio material on the other side.  
However, since the audio material side does  
not conform to the Compact Disc (CD)  
standard, playback on this product is not  
guaranteed.  
Disc  
Number of titles*  
HDD  
300  
99  
DVD-RW/DVD-R  
DVD+RW/DVD+R  
DVD+R DL  
49  
49  
* The maximum length for one title is eight hours.  
b Notes  
• Some DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, DVD-RWs/DVD-  
Rs, DVD-RAMs, or CD-RWs/CD-Rs cannot be  
played on this recorder due to the recording  
quality or physical condition of the disc, or the  
characteristics of the recording device and  
authoring software. The disc will not play if it has  
not been correctly finalised. For more  
information, see the operating instructions for the  
recording device.  
• You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the  
same DVD-RW. To change the disc’s format,  
reformat the disc (page 46). Note that the disc’s  
contents will be erased after reformatting.  
• You cannot shorten the time required for  
recording even with high-speed discs.  
• It is recommended that you use discs with “For  
Video” printed on their packaging.  
• You cannot add new recordings to DVD+Rs,  
DVD-Rs, or DVD-RWs (Video mode) that  
contain recordings made on other DVD  
equipment.  
• In some cases, you may not be able to add new  
recordings to DVD+RWs that contain recordings  
made on other DVD equipment. If you do add a  
new recording, note that this recorder will rewrite  
the DVD menu.  
Note on playback operations of DVD  
VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs  
Some playback operations of DVD VIDEOs/  
VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by  
software producers. Since this recorder plays  
DVD VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs according to the  
disc contents the software producers  
designed, some playback features may not be  
available. See the instructions supplied with  
the DVD VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs.  
Region code (DVD VIDEO only)  
Your recorder has a region code printed on  
the rear of the unit and will only play DVD  
VIDEOs (playback only) labelled with  
identical region codes. This system is used to  
protect copyrights.  
DVD VIDEOs labelled  
on this recorder.  
will also play  
ALL  
If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO, the  
message “Playback prohibited by region  
code.” will appear on the TV screen.  
Depending on the DVD VIDEO, no region  
code indication may be labelled even though  
playing the DVD VIDEO is prohibited by  
area restrictions.  
• You cannot edit recordings on DVD+RWs,  
DVD-RWs (Video mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs  
that are made on other DVD equipment.  
• If the disc contains PC data unrecognizable by  
this recorder, the data may be erased.  
• You may not be able to record on some  
recordable discs, depending on the disc.  
• Do not insert any discs that cannot be recorded or  
played on this recorder. This may cause the  
recorder to malfunction.  
Region code  
Music discs encoded with copyright  
protection technologies  
This product is designed to play back discs  
that conform to the Compact Disc (CD)  
standard.  
Recently, various music discs encoded with  
copyright protection technologies are being  
marketed by some record companies. Please  
be aware that among those discs, there are  
some that do not conform to the CD standard  
and may not be playable by this product.  
,continued  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hookups and Settings  
Hooking Up the Recorder  
Follow steps 1 through 6 to hook up and adjust the settings of the recorder. Do not connect the  
b Notes  
• See “Specifications” (page 161) for a list of supplied accessories.  
• Plug in cords securely to prevent unwanted noise.  
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the components to be connected.  
• You cannot connect this recorder to a TV that does not have a SCART or video input jack.  
• Be sure to disconnect the mains lead of each component before connecting.  
Checking hookup and setting methods  
The recorder incorporates both analogue and digital tuners. You must select one. The  
programme guide and timer recording method differ depending on which one you select.  
Depending on the broadcasts you are receiving and your equipment, select one of the following  
aerial hookups. Do NOT set “Line3 Input” of the “Scart Setting” to “Decoder” in the “Video”  
setup (page 142) when making connection B.  
When you  
receive  
Hookup  
Settings for  
“Easy Setup”  
Programme  
guide  
Timer recording  
usingprogramme  
guide  
Freeview  
“Digital”  
Digital Service  
Satellite, Cable B (page 17)  
“Analogue”  
(default)  
GUIDE Plus+  
Terrestrial  
“Analogue”  
(default)  
GUIDE Plus+  
b Note  
Beginning in 2008, analogue broadcasts in the UK will end area by area, with all analogue broadcasts  
scheduled to end by 2012. After analogue broadcasts end in your area, you will not be able to use hookup C  
to view TV broadcasts. At that time, change to hookup A to view digital broadcasts.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Step 1: Connecting the Aerial Cable and Set Top Box  
Controller  
If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals  
This recorder accepts RGB signals. If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals, connect  
the TV SCART connector on the set top box receiver to the LINE 3/DECODER jack, and set  
“Line3 Input” of “Scart Setting” to “Video/RGB” in the “Video” setup (page 142). Note that  
this connection and setup disable the SMARTLINK function. If you want to use the  
SMARTLINK function with a compatible set top box receiver, see the instructions supplied  
with the set top box receiver.  
If you want to use the Synchro Rec function  
A SCART connection between the set top box receiver and the recorder is necessary to use the  
Set “Line3 Input” of “Scart Setting” in the “Video” setup (page 142) according to the  
specifications of your set top box receiver. See your set top box receiver’s instructions for more  
information.  
If you are using a SKY tuner, be sure to connect the tuner’s VCR SCART jack to the LINE 3/  
DECODER jack. Then set “Line3 Input” of “Scart Setting” according to the specifications of  
the VCR SCART jack on your satellite tuner.  
Using the set top box receiver control function  
The set top box receiver control function can be used with hookup B. It allows the recorder to  
control a set top box receiver via the supplied set top box controller. The recorder controls  
programme positions on the set top box receiver for timer recording. You can also use the  
recorder’s remote control to change programme positions on the set top box receiver whenever  
the set top box receiver and recorder are turned on.  
To use the set top box receiver control function, you need to connect the set top box controller  
(page 27). After setting up the set top box receiver control, check that the recorder can correctly  
control the set top box receiver (page 28).  
b Notes  
• If your aerial is a flat cable (300-ohm twin lead cable), use an external aerial connector (not supplied) to  
connect the aerial to the recorder.  
• If you have separate cables for AERIAL antennas, use an AERIAL UHF/VHF band mixer (not supplied)  
to connect the aerial to the recorder.  
• Synchro-Recording does not work with some tuners. For details, see the tuner’s operating instructions.  
• If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you will not be able to view the signals from the connected  
set top box receiver.  
,continued  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A: Receiving Freeview (For Digital Mode)  
Use this hookup if you can receive Freeview.  
With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme position  
on the recorder.  
Wall  
TV  
to aerial input  
Aerial cable (supplied)  
to DIGITAL AERIAL IN  
to DIGITAL AERIAL OUT  
DVD recorder  
: Signal flow  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
B: Receiving cable or satellite (For Analogue Mode)  
With this hookup, you can record any programme position on the set top box receiver.  
To watch cable programmes, you need to match the programme position on the recorder to the  
aerial output programme position on the set top box receiver.  
Place the set top box controller  
near the remote sensor on the  
set top box receiver.  
Wall  
Set top box  
controller  
Set top box  
receiver  
ANT IN  
TO TV  
SCART cord*2  
(not supplied)  
Aerial cable*1  
(supplied)  
to ANALOG  
AERIAL IN  
to G-LINK  
DVD recorder  
to ANALOG AERIAL OUT  
TV  
to aerial input  
: Signal flow  
*1  
*2  
If your set top box receiver does not have an  
aerial output jack, connect the aerial to the  
recorder’s ANALOG AERIAL IN jack.  
Connect only if your set top box receiver has a  
SCART connection.  
,continued  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
C: Receiving terrestrial (For Analogue Mode)  
Use this hookup if you watch cable programme position without a set top box receiver. Also  
use this hookup if you are connecting just an aerial antenna.  
With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme position  
on the recorder.  
Wall  
to ANALOG AERIAL IN  
DVD recorder  
to ANALOG AERIAL OUT  
TV  
to aerial input  
Aerial cable (supplied)  
: Signal flow  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 2: Connecting the Video Cords/HDMI Cord  
Select one of the following patterns, A through E, according to the input jack on your TV  
monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable you to view pictures.  
B
D
INPUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
Component  
video cord  
(not supplied)  
VIDEO  
Audio/video cord  
(not supplied)  
Y
(green)  
P
B/CB  
(blue)  
(red)  
L
PR/CR  
AUDIO  
R
TV, projector, or AV  
amplifier (receiver)  
TV, projector, or AV  
amplifier (receiver)  
(yellow)  
to COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
(blue)  
(red)  
(green)  
to LINE 2 OUT (VIDEO)  
DVD recorder  
to HDMI OUT  
to LINE 2 OUT  
(S VIDEO)  
to i LINE 1 – TV  
HDMI cord  
(not supplied)  
SCART cord  
(not supplied)  
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
E
C
A
HDMI IN  
S VIDEO  
INPUT  
TV, projector, or AV  
amplifier (receiver)  
TV, projector, or AV  
amplifier (receiver)  
TV  
: Signal flow  
,continued  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
b Notes  
A SCART input jack  
• Do not connect more than one type of video cord  
between the recorder and your TV at the same  
time.  
• When you connect the recorder to your TV via the  
SCART jacks, the TV’s input source is set to the  
recorder automatically when you start playback.  
If necessary, press TV t on the remote to return  
the input to the TV.  
When you set “Easy Setup - Line1 Output” to  
“S Video” or “RGB” (page 27), use a  
SCART cord that conforms to the selected  
signal.  
B Video input jack  
You will enjoy standard quality images.  
• For correct SMARTLINK connection, you will  
need a SCART cord that has the full 21 pins.  
Refer to your TV’s instruction manual as well for  
this connection.  
C S VIDEO input jack  
You will enjoy high quality images.  
• If you connect this recorder to a TV with  
SMARTLINK, set “Easy Setup - Line1 Output”  
to “Video.”  
• You cannot connect the HDMI OUT jack  
(connection E) to DVI jacks that are not HDCP  
compliant (e.g., DVI jacks on PC displays).  
• If the recorder is connected to your TV via the  
HDMI jacks, each time you turn the power on, the  
picture will appear first, while the sound will  
initially be silent for a moment.  
D Component video input jacks (Y, PB/CB,  
PR/CR)  
You will enjoy accurate colour reproduction  
and high quality images.  
If your TV accepts progressive 525p/625p  
format signals, use this connection and set  
“Component Out” in the “Video” setup to  
“On” (page 141). Then set “Progressive  
Output” to “On” in the “Video” setup to send  
progressive video signals. For details, see  
* This DVD recorder incorporates High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface (HDMI™) technology.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
E HDMI input jack  
Use a certified HDMI cord (not supplied) to  
enjoy high quality digital picture and sound  
through the HDMI OUT jack.  
About the SMARTLINK  
features (for SCART  
connections only)  
When playing “wide screen” images  
Some recorded images may not fit your TV  
screen. To change the picture size, see  
If the connected TV (or other connected  
equipment such as a set top box) complies  
If you are connecting to a VCR  
Connect your VCR to the LINE 3/  
DECODER jack on the recorder (page 30).  
*3  
with SMARTLINK, NexTView Link  
,
*1  
*2  
MEGALOGIC , EASYLINK  
CINEMALINK , Q-Link , EURO VIEW  
,
*2  
*3  
*4  
*5  
LINK , or T-V LINK , you can enjoy the  
following SMARTLINK features.  
For recording  
• TV Direct Rec.  
You can easily record what you are  
watching on your TV (page 36).  
• One Touch Timer  
You can turn on the recorder and TV, set the  
TV to the recorder’s programme position,  
and display the timer programming menu  
(in Digital Mode) or the GUIDE Plus+  
system “Schedule” (in Analogue Mode)  
with one touch of the [TIMER] button  
(pages 58, 82).  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
z Hint  
• One Touch EPG  
SMARTLINK also works with TVs or other  
equipment having EPG Timer Control, EPG Title  
Download, and Now Recording functions. For  
details, refer to the operating instructions supplied  
with your TV or other equipment.  
– in Analogue Mode  
You can turn on the recorder and TV, set the  
TV to the recorder’s programme position,  
and display the GUIDE Plus+ system  
“Home Screen” with one touch of the  
GUIDE  
– in Digital Mode  
button.  
b Notes  
• The SMARTLINK features are available only  
when “Video” is selected in “Line1 Output.”  
• The power must be turned on to use all  
SMARTLINK features except One Touch Play,  
One Touch Menu, One Touch Timer and One  
Touch EPG.  
You can turn on the recorder and TV, set the  
TV to the recorder’s programme position,  
and display the Electronic Programme  
Guide screen with one touch of the GUIDE  
button (page 48).  
• Not all TVs respond to the functions above.  
For playback  
• One Touch Play  
You can turn on the recorder and TV, set the  
TV’s input to the recorder, and start  
playback with one touch of the H (play)  
button (page 91).  
• One Touch Menu  
You can turn on the recorder and TV, set the  
TV to the recorder’s programme position,  
and display the Title List menu with one  
touch of the TITLE LIST button (page 91).  
For settings  
• Preset Download (Analogue Mode only)  
You can download the tuner preset data  
from your TV to this recorder, and tune the  
recorder according to that data in “Easy  
Setup.” This greatly simplifies the “Easy  
Setup” procedure.  
• Automatic Power Off  
The recorder will turn off automatically if  
the recorder is not used after you turn off  
the TV.  
• NexTView Download (Analogue Mode  
only)  
You can easily set the timer by using the  
NexTView Download function on your TV.  
See your TV’s instruction manual.  
*1  
“MEGALOGIC” is a registered trademark of  
Grundig Corporation.  
“EASYLINK” and “CINEMALINK” are  
*2  
trademarks of Philips Corporation.  
“Q-Link” and “NexTView Link” are trademarks  
*3  
of Panasonic Corporation.  
“EURO VIEW LINK” is a trademark of Toshiba  
*4  
Corporation.  
“T-V LINK” is a trademark of JVC Corporation.  
*5  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Step 3: Connecting the Audio Cords  
Select one of the following patterns, A or B, according to the input jack on your TV monitor,  
projector, or AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable you to listen to sound.  
[Speakers]  
[Speakers]  
Rear (L)  
Rear (R)  
A
AV amplifier (receiver)  
with a decoder  
Front (L)  
Front (R)  
Centre  
Subwoofer  
to coaxial or optical/  
HDMI digital input  
or  
or  
Coaxial digital cord  
(not supplied)  
Optical digital cord  
(not supplied)  
HDMI cord  
(not supplied)  
to DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)  
to HDMI OUT  
DVD recorder  
to LINE 2 OUT  
(R-AUDIO-L)  
INPUT  
VIDEO  
B
Audio/video cord  
(not supplied)  
(white)  
(red)  
(yellow)  
(white)  
(red)  
L
AUDIO  
R
(yellow)*  
TV, projector, or AV  
amplifier (receiver)  
: Signal flow  
* The yellow plug is used for video signals (page 19).  
A Digital audio input jack  
B Audio L/R (left/right) input jacks  
This connection will use your TV’s or stereo  
amplifier’s (receiver’s) two speakers for  
sound.  
*1  
If your AV amplifier (receiver) has a Dolby  
*2  
Digital, DTS , or MPEG audio decoder and  
a digital input jack, use this connection. You  
can enjoy Dolby Digital (5.1ch), DTS  
(5.1ch), and MPEG audio (5.1ch) surround  
effects.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
z Hint  
For correct speaker location, see the operating  
instructions supplied with the connected  
components.  
Step 4: Connecting the  
Mains Lead  
b Notes  
• Do not connect your TV’s audio output jacks to  
the LINE IN (R-AUDIO-L) jacks at the same  
time. This will cause unwanted noise to come  
from your TV’s speakers.  
Connect the supplied mains lead to the AC IN  
terminal of the recorder. Then plug the  
recorder and TV mains leads (power cords)  
into the mains. After you connect the mains  
lead, you must wait for a short while  
before operating the recorder. You can  
operate the recorder once the front panel  
display lights up and the recorder enters  
standby mode.  
• With connection B, do not connect the LINE IN  
(R-AUDIO-L) and LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L)  
jacks to your TV’s audio output jacks at the same  
time. This will cause unwanted noise to come  
from your TV’s speakers.  
• With connection A, after you have completed the  
connection, make the appropriate settings under  
“Easy Setup - Audio Connection” (page 27).  
Otherwise, no sound or a loud noise will come  
from your speakers.  
If you connect additional equipment to this  
recorder (page 30), be sure to connect the  
mains lead after all connections are complete.  
• When you connect the recorder to an AV  
amplifier (receiver) using an HDMI cord, you  
will need to do one of the following:  
– Connect the AV amplifier (receiver) to the TV  
with the HDMI cord.  
– Connect the recorder to the TV with a video  
cord other than HDMI cord (component video  
cord, S VIDEO cord, or audio/video cord).  
1
to AC IN  
to mains  
2
*1  
Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories.  
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of  
*2  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Controlling TVs with the  
remote  
Step 5: Preparing the  
Remote  
You can adjust the remote’s signal to control  
your TV.  
You can control the recorder using the  
supplied remote. Insert two R6 (size AA)  
batteries by matching the 3 and # ends on  
the batteries to the markings inside the  
battery compartment. When using the  
b Notes  
• Depending on the connected unit, you may not be  
able to control your TV with some or all of the  
buttons below.  
remote, point it at the remote sensor  
recorder.  
on the  
• If you enter a new code number, the code number  
previously entered will be erased.  
Number  
buttons  
b Notes  
• If the supplied remote interferes your other Sony  
DVD recorder or player, change the command  
mode number for this recorder (page 25).  
• Use the batteries correctly to avoid possible  
leakage and corrosion. Should leakage occur, do  
not touch the liquid with bare hands. Observe the  
following:  
TV 2 +/–  
– Do not use a new battery with an old battery, or  
batteries of different manufacturers.  
TV [/1  
TV t  
TV/DVD  
TV PROG  
+/–  
– Do not attempt to recharge the batteries.  
– If you do not intend to use the remote for an  
extended period of time, remove the batteries.  
– If battery leakage occurs, wipe out any liquid  
inside the battery compartment, and insert new  
batteries.  
1 Hold down the TV [/1 button located  
at the bottom of the remote.  
Do not press the [/1 button at the top of  
the remote.  
• Do not expose the remote sensor (marked  
the front panel) to strong light, such as direct  
on  
sunlight or a lighting apparatus. The recorder may  
not respond to the remote.  
• When you replace the batteries of the remote, the  
code number and Command Mode may be reset  
to the default setting. Set the appropriate code  
number and Command Mode again.  
2 With the TV [/1 button pressed down,  
enter the TV’s manufacturer code  
using the number buttons.  
For instance, to enter “09,” press “0” then  
“9.” After you enter the last number,  
release the TV [/1 button.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Code numbers of controllable TVs  
If more than one code number is listed,  
try entering them one at a time until you  
find the one that works with your TV.  
To operate the TV/DVD button  
(for SCART connections only)  
The TV/DVD button switches between the  
recorder and the last input source selected on  
the TV. Point your remote at the recorder  
when using this button.  
When you connect the recorder to the TV via  
the SCART jacks, the input source for the TV  
is set to the recorder automatically when you  
start playback. To watch another source,  
press the TV/DVD button to switch the TV’s  
input source.  
Manufacturer  
Sony  
Code number  
01 (default)  
Grundig  
Hitachi  
ITT/Nokia  
JVC  
11  
24  
15, 16  
33  
Loewe  
45  
If you have a Sony DVD player  
or more than one Sony DVD  
recorder  
Nokia  
69, 73  
17, 49  
06, 07, 08, 72  
12, 13, 74  
22, 23, 71  
25  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Saba  
If the supplied remote interferes with your  
other Sony DVD recorder or player, set the  
command mode number for this recorder and  
the supplied remote to one that differs from  
the other Sony DVD recorder or player after  
you have completed “Step 6: Easy Setup.”  
The default command mode setting for this  
recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3.  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Sharp  
29  
Telefunken  
Thomson  
Toshiba  
36  
43, 75  
38  
The remote performs the following:  
Number  
buttons  
Buttons  
Operations  
TV [/1  
Turns your TV on or  
off  
TV 2 (volume) Adjusts the volume  
+/–  
of your TV  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
TV PROG +/–  
Selects the  
programme position  
on your TV  
M/m,  
ENTER  
TV t  
Switches your TV’s  
input source  
1 Check that “Easy Setup” (page 27)  
has been finished. If “Easy Setup” has  
not been finished, first perform “Easy  
Setup.”  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
,continued  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.  
To check the Command Mode for the  
recorder  
Example: Digital Mode  
Press x on the recorder when the recorder is  
turned off. The Command Mode for the  
recorder appears in the front panel display.  
If the Command Mode for the recorder has  
not been changed, set the Command Mode  
for the remote to the default setting of  
DVD3. If the Command Mode for the  
remote is changed to DVD1 or DVD2, you  
will be unable to operate this recorder.  
4 Select “Others,” and press ENTER.  
Changing programme positions  
of the recorder using the  
remote  
You can change programme positions of the  
recorder using the number buttons.  
5 Select “Command Mode,” and press  
ENTER.  
Number  
buttons  
ENTER  
6 Select a Command Mode (DVD1,  
DVD2, or DVD3), and press ENTER.  
7 Set the Command Mode for the remote  
so it matches the Command Mode for  
the recorder you set above.  
Example: for channel 50  
Follow the steps below to set the  
Command Mode on the remote.  
1 Hold down ENTER.  
Press “5,” “0,” then press ENTER.  
2 While holding down ENTER, enter  
the Command Mode code number  
using the number buttons.  
Command Mode Code number  
DVD1  
DVD2  
DVD3  
number button 1  
number button 2  
number button 3  
3 Hold down both the number and  
ENTER buttons at the same time for  
more than three seconds.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 Press ENTER.  
Follow the on-screen instructions to  
make the following settings.  
Step 6: Easy Setup  
Easy Setup - Analogue or Digital Mode  
Select either “Digital” or “Analogue”  
Mode.  
• Select “Digital” if the aerial cable is  
connected to DIGITAL AERIAL IN  
(hookup A).  
Make the basic adjustments by following the  
on-screen instructions in “Easy Setup.”  
Be careful not to disconnect the cables or exit  
the “Easy Setup” function during this  
procedure.  
• Select “Analogue” if the aerial cable is  
connected to ANALOG AERIAL IN  
(hookup B or C).  
• You can select either Mode if the aerial  
cable is connected to both DIGITAL  
AERIAL IN and ANALOG AERIAL  
IN.  
[/1  
Number  
buttons  
For details, see page 14.  
The recorder turns off and then turns on  
automatically if you change Mode.  
GUIDE  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
Easy Setup - Postal Code (Analogue  
Mode only)  
O
RETURN  
Enter your postal code using the number  
buttons or </M/m/,, and press  
ENTER.  
To erase a number, move the cursor to  
the number, and press O RETURN.  
TV [/1  
Easy Setup - Auto Tune (Digital Mode  
only)  
The recorder will automatically capture  
and store the available TV and Radio  
channels.  
1 Turn on the recorder and your TV.  
Then switch the input selector on your  
TV so that the signal from the recorder  
appears on your TV screen.  
Easy Setup - Auto Tuner Preset  
(Analogue Mode only)  
The programme position order will be  
set.  
To set the programme positions  
The initial settings message appears.  
• If this message does not appear, select  
“Easy Setup” from “SETUP” in the  
System Menu (page 151).  
Easy Setup - Clock  
The recorder will automatically search  
for a clock signal. If a clock signal cannot  
be found, set the clock manually using  
</M/m/,, and press ENTER.  
Easy Setup - TV Type (page 140)  
If you have a wide-screen TV, select  
“16:9.” If you have a standard TV, select  
either “4:3 Letter Box” (shrink to fit) or  
“4:3 Pan Scan” (stretch to fit). This will  
determine how “wide-screen” images are  
displayed on your TV.  
Easy Setup - Component Out  
If you are using the COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT jack, select “On.”  
,continued  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Easy Setup - Line3 Input (Analogue  
Mode only)  
If you plan to connect a decoder such as  
a PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder  
to the LINE 3/DECODER jack, select  
“Yes.”  
Setting up your set top box  
receiver for the GUIDE Plus+  
system (Analogue Mode only)  
®
Follow the steps below to set up your set top  
box receiver for the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
Note that the OSD language, Clock, Country  
and Postal Code are all set for the GUIDE  
Plus+ system when Easy Setup is completed.  
Easy Setup - Line1 Output  
To output video signals, select “Video.”  
To output S video signals, select “S  
Video.”  
To output RGB signals, select “RGB.”  
Select “Video” to enjoy the  
SMARTLINK features (page 20).  
• If you set “Easy Setup - Component  
Out” to “On,” you cannot select  
“RGB.”  
• If you set “Easy Setup - Line3 Input” to  
“Yes,” you cannot select “S Video.”  
1 Press GUIDE  
.
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home  
Screen” appears.  
2 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar using  
M/,, and press ENTER.  
The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.  
Easy Setup - Audio Connection  
If you connected an AV amplifier  
(receiver) using either a digital optical or  
coaxial cord, select “Yes : DIGITAL  
OUT” and set the digital output signal  
3 Select “Basic Setup” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
4 Select “External Receiver 1,” and  
press ENTER.  
You can also select “External Receiver  
2” or “External Receiver 3” if you have  
connected additional set top box  
receivers.  
3 Press ENTER when “Finish” appears.  
“Easy Setup” is finished.  
To receive GUIDE Plus+ system data  
your recorder must be turned off  
when not in use. If your recorder is  
connected to a set top box receiver, be  
sure to leave the set top box receiver  
turned on. After initial setup, it may  
take up to 24 hours to begin receiving  
TV programme listings.  
5 Press ENTER to select “Continue.”  
6 Select the set top box receiver type  
using M/m, and press ENTER.  
7 Select the provider using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
8 Select the receiver brand using M/m,  
and press ENTER.  
If you select “Other providers,” you can  
select a receiver brand from a list of all  
available brands.  
If your receiver brand is not on the list,  
select “???.”  
To return to the previous step  
Press O RETURN.  
z Hints  
The receiver brand list is automatically  
updated, so your receiver may be  
available at a later date. Select your brand  
when it becomes available. Until then,  
use “???.”  
• If your AV amplifier (receiver) has an MPEG  
audio decoder, set “MPEG” to “MPEG”  
• If you want to run “Easy Setup” again, select  
“Easy Setup” from “SETUP” in the System Menu  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
9 Select the connection you used for  
your set top box receiver using M/m,  
and press ENTER.  
To fix the set top box controller to your set  
top box receiver  
Once you have confirmed that the set top box  
controller controls your set top box receiver,  
fix it in place.  
When the set top box receiver is  
connected to the recorder using hookup  
B with both an aerial cable and a SCART  
cord, select either “Line3” or “Antenna.”  
The display asks for confirmation.  
1
Remove the backing on the double-sided  
tape.  
10 Press ENTER to select “Continue.”  
The Video Window switches to the  
specified programme position.  
11 Select “YES” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
2
Attach it so that the set top box controller  
is directly above the remote control  
sensor on your set top box receiver.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
If the Video Window does not switch to  
the specified programme position, select  
“NO” and press ENTER until the Video  
Window switches to the specified  
programme position.  
If you cannot get the recorder to control  
your set top box receiver  
Check the connection and position of the set  
top box controller (page 16).  
If your set top box receiver still does not  
operate with this recorder, refer to the  
instructions supplied with your set top box  
receiver and contact your cable or satellite  
company to see if they can provide you with  
a compatible set top box receiver.  
b Notes  
• The list of external receivers controllable by the  
GUIDE Plus+ system is updated constantly and is  
distributed through GUIDE Plus+ system data  
signals. Since the time your recorder has been  
produced and the time you installed your recorder  
for the first time, new external receiver codes  
might have been added.  
• If the external receiver is still not on the list or is  
not controlled properly by the recorder, please  
call Customer Support to report the brand and  
model of your external receiver.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting a VCR or Similar Device  
After disconnecting the recorder’s mains lead from the mains, connect a VCR or similar  
recording device to the LINE IN jacks of this recorder.  
Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack (i.LINK jack)  
For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the connected equipment.  
Connecting to the LINE 3/DECODER jack  
Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 3/DECODER jack of this recorder.  
TV  
VCR  
SCART cord (not supplied)  
to SCART input  
to i LINE 3/DECODER  
to i LINE 1 – TV  
DVD recorder  
b Notes  
• Pictures containing copy protection signals that prohibit any copying cannot be recorded.  
• If you pass the recorder signals through a VCR, you may not receive a clear image on your TV screen.  
DVD recorder  
VCR  
TV  
Be sure to connect your VCR to the DVD recorder and to your TV in the order shown below. To watch  
video tapes, watch the tapes through a second line input on your TV.  
Line input 1  
VCR  
DVD recorder  
TV  
Line input 2  
• The SMARTLINK features are not available for devices connected via the DVD recorder’s LINE 3/  
DECODER jack.  
• When you record to a VCR from this DVD recorder, do not switch the input source to TV by pressing the  
TV/DVD button on the remote.  
• If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you will not be able to view the signals from the connected  
VCR.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel  
Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 2 IN jacks of this recorder. If the  
equipment has an S-video jack, you can use an S-video cord instead of an audio/video cord.  
VCR, etc.  
OUTPUT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
S VIDEO  
L
R
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
Audio/video cord  
(not supplied)  
to LINE 2 IN  
DVD recorder  
: Signal flow  
z Hint  
When the connected equipment outputs only monaural sound, connect to just the L(MONO) and VIDEO  
input jacks on the front of the recorder. Do not connect the R input jack.  
b Notes  
• Do not connect the yellow LINE IN (VIDEO) jack when using an S-video cord.  
• Do not connect the output jack of this recorder to another equipment’s input jack with the other  
equipment’s output jack connected to the input jack of this recorder. This may cause noise (feedback).  
• Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting a PAY-TV/Canal Plus Analogue Decoder  
(Analogue Mode only)  
You can watch or record PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder programmes if you connect a  
decoder (not supplied) to the recorder. Disconnect the recorder’s mains lead from the mains  
when connecting the decoder. Note that when you set “Line3 Input” to “Decoder” in step 5 of  
(page 33), you will not be able to select “L3” because Line 3 will become a dedicated line for  
the decoder.  
Connecting a decoder  
PAY-TV/Canal Plus  
analogue decoder  
TV  
Aerial cable (supplied)  
to AERIAL IN  
to SCART input  
SCART cord  
(not supplied)  
SCART cord  
(not supplied)  
to ANALOG AERIAL OUT  
to i LINE 1 – TV  
to i LINE 3/DECODER  
DVD recorder  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 Select “Scart Setting,” and press  
ENTER.  
Setting PAY-TV/Canal Plus  
analogue programme positions  
(Analogue Mode only)  
To watch or record PAY-TV/Canal Plus  
analogue programmes, set your recorder to  
receive the programme positions using the  
on-screen display.  
In order to set the programme positions  
correctly, be sure to follow all of the steps  
below.  
5 Press M/mto select “Video” or “RGB”  
for “Line1 Output,” “Decoder” for  
“Line3 Input,” and “Video” for “Line3  
Output,” and press ENTER.  
The “Video” setup display appears again.  
Number  
buttons  
6 Press O RETURN to return the cursor  
to the left column.  
7 Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
O
RETURN  
8 Select “Programme Setting,” and  
press ENTER.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.  
9 Press M/m to select the desired  
programme position, and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select “Video,” and press ENTER.  
,continued  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
10 Select “System” using </,.  
11 Press M/m to select an available TV  
system, BG, DK, I, or L.  
To receive broadcasts in France, select  
“L.”  
12 Select “Channel” using </,.  
13 Select the PAY-TV/Canal Plus  
analogue programme position using  
M/m or number buttons.  
14 Select “PAY-TV/CANAL+” using </  
,.  
15 Select “On” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
To return to the previous step  
Press O RETURN.  
b Note  
If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you  
will not be able to view the signals from the  
connected decoder.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Eight Basic Operations  
2. Recording a  
Programme  
— Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder  
1. Inserting a Disc  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
+
+
R
-
-
-
RVR  
RW  
RWVR RWVideo  
-
RVideo  
This section introduces the basic operation to  
record a current TV programme to the hard  
disk (HDD) or to a disc (DVD). For an  
explanation of how to make timer recordings,  
see page 55 (Digital Mode) or page 79  
(Analogue Mode).  
DVD VCD CD  
DATA DVD  
DATA CD  
Z (open/  
close)  
DVD  
HDD  
DVD  
PROG +/–  
DISPLAY  
OPTIONS  
1 Press DVD.  
2 Press Z (open/close), and place a  
disc on the disc tray.  
z REC  
REC MODE  
x REC  
STOP  
Recording/playing side facing down  
TV/DVD  
TV t  
3 Press Z(open/close) to close the disc  
tray.  
Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the  
front panel display.  
Unused DVDs are formatted  
automatically.  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
If you want to record to a DVD, insert a  
recordable DVD.  
• For DVD-RW discs  
2 Press PROG +/– to select the  
programme position or input source  
you want to record.  
DVD-RWs are formatted in the  
recording format (VR mode or Video  
mode) set by “Format DVD-RW” in  
the “DVD” setup.  
3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select  
• For DVD-R discs  
the recording mode.  
DVD-Rs are automatically formatted in  
Video mode. To format an unused  
DVD-R in VR mode, format the disc  
using the “Disc Information” display  
(page 46) before you make a  
recording.  
Each time you press the button, the  
display on the TV screen changes as  
follows:  
If the disc is recordable on this recorder,  
you can manually re-format the disc to  
make a blank disc (page 46).  
For more details about the recording  
mode, see page 79.  
,continued  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 Press z REC.  
About the Teletext function  
Recording starts.  
Some broadcast systems ensure a Teletext  
service* in which the complete programmes  
and their data (title, date, programme  
position, recording start time etc.) are stored  
day by day. When recording a programme,  
the recorder automatically takes the  
programme name from the Teletext pages  
and stores it as the title name. For details, see  
Recording stops automatically after 8  
hours of continuous recording or when  
the HDD or DVD is full.  
To stop recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for  
recorder to stop recording.  
Note that the Teletext information will not  
appear on your TV screen. To view the  
Teletext information on your TV screen,  
press TV/DVD on the remote to switch the  
input source to your TV (page 24).  
To record the entire programme (Rec.  
Event) (Analogue mode only)  
Press OPTIONS to select “Rec. Event.” The  
current programme that you are watching will  
be recorded. Recording automatically stops  
when the programme ends.  
* not available in some areas  
b Notes  
• After pressing z REC, it may take a short while  
to start recording.  
To watch another TV programme while  
recording  
• You cannot change the recording mode while  
recording.  
• If there is a power failure, the programme you are  
recording may be erased.  
If your TV is connected to the i LINE 1 –  
TV jack, set your TV to the TV input using  
the TV/DVD button and select the  
programme you want to watch. If your TV is  
connected to the LINE 2 OUT or  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, set the  
TV to TV input using the TV t button  
Checking the disc status while  
recording  
You can check the recording information  
such as recording time or disc type.  
TV Direct Rec.  
If you are using the SMARTLINK  
connection and the “TV Direct Rec.” is set to  
“On” (page 146), you can easily record what  
you are watching on your TV.  
Press DISPLAY during recording.  
The recording information appears.  
When the TV and the recorder are turned on,  
press z REC. The recorder starts recording  
what you are watching on your TV.  
b Note  
If “TV” appears in the front panel display, you  
cannot turn off the TV or change the programme  
position during TV Direct Rec. To turn off the  
function, set “TV Direct Rec.” to “Off” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 146).  
A Disc type/format  
B Recording status  
C Recording mode  
D Recording time  
Press DISPLAY to turn off the display.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
To show the extended Title List, press  
OPTIONS to select “Display List,” and  
press ENTER.  
3. Playing the Recorded  
Programme (Title List)  
Title List with Thumbnail Images  
(Example: DVD+RW)  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
To play a recorded title, select the title from  
the Title List.  
HDD  
DVD  
m
Extended Title List  
TITLE LIST  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
/
mc  
CM  
x
A Disc type:  
Displays the media type, HDD or DVD.  
Also displays the title type.  
• “ORIGINAL,” “PLAYLIST,”  
“Music,” and “Photos” for HDD titles  
• “ORIGINAL,” “PLAYLIST” for  
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) titles  
• “Music,” “Photos” for DATA DVD/  
DATA CD titles  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
If you select DVD, insert a DVD (see “1.  
Playback starts automatically depending  
on the disc.  
B Disc space (remainder/total (237 GB  
for Video data, 13 GB for MP3/JPEG  
data for HDD))  
C Title information:  
Displays the title number, title name, and  
recording date. Title size is shown in the  
Thumbnail title list.  
z (red): Indicates that the title is  
currently being recorded.  
: Indicates that the title is currently  
being dubbed.  
: Indicates the protected title.  
“NEW”: Indicates that the title is newly  
recorded (not played back) (HDD only).  
,continued  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
: Indicates titles containing “Copy-  
Once” copy protection signals (HDD  
: Indicates that the title is created by  
the Photomovie function (HDD only)  
About the Title List for HDD/DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs (VR mode)  
You can switch the Title List to show  
Original or Playlist titles.  
While the Title List menu is turned on, press  
</,.  
: Indicates that the title is newly  
created by the Photomovie function (not  
played back) (HDD only) (page 127).  
: Indicates that the title is created by  
the Auto Photomovie function (HDD  
To change the title order (Sort)  
While the Title List menu is turned on, press  
OPTIONS to select “Sort Titles.” Press M/m  
to select the item, and press ENTER.  
Order  
Sorted  
D Scroll bar:  
By Date  
In order of when the titles  
were recorded. The title that is  
recorded most recently is  
listed at the top.  
Appears when all of the titles do not fit  
on the list. To view the hidden titles,  
press M/m.  
E Title’s thumbnail picture:  
The still images for each title are  
displayed.  
By Title  
In alphabetical order.  
By Number  
In order of recorded title  
number.  
3 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
Unseen Title  
(HDD only)  
In order of when the titles  
were recorded. The title that is  
recorded most recently and  
has not been played is listed at  
the top. Playlist titles are not  
displayed.  
The sub-menu appears.  
The sub-menu displays options  
applicable only to the selected item. The  
displayed options differ depending upon  
the model, situation, and disc type.  
To change a title thumbnail picture  
(Thumbnail) (HDD/DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR  
mode only)  
You can select a favourite scene for the  
thumbnail picture shown in the Title List  
menu.  
1
Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch the Title Lists, if  
necessary.  
Sub-menu  
4 Select “Play,” and press ENTER.  
2
3
Select a title, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
Playback starts from the selected title.  
Select “Set Thumbnail,” and press  
ENTER.  
The display for setting the thumbnail  
point appears and the title starts to play.  
To stop playback  
Press x (stop).  
To scroll the list display by page (Page  
mode)  
4
While watching the playback picture,  
press m/M to select the scene you  
want to set for a thumbnail picture, and  
press ENTER.  
Press  
/
while the list display is turned  
, the entire  
on. Each time you press  
/
Title List changes to the next/previous page  
of titles.  
Playback pauses.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5
6
Press ENTER if the scene is correct.  
If the scene is incorrect, press c/C to  
select the scene you want to set for a  
thumbnail picture, and press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
• To change the thumbnail, press M.  
4. Displaying the  
Playing/Remaining Time  
and Play Information  
Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The scene is set for the title’s thumbnail  
picture.  
+
RW  
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RWVR RWVideo  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
DVD VCD  
CD  
DATA DVD DATA CD  
To turn off the Title List  
You can check the playing time and  
remaining time of the current title, chapter,  
track, or disc. Also, you can check the disc  
name recorded on the DVD/CD.  
Press TITLE LIST.  
z Hints  
• After recording, the first scene of the recording  
(the title) is automatically set as the thumbnail  
picture.  
• You can select “TITLE LIST” from the System  
Menu.  
b Notes  
• The title names may not appear for DVDs created  
on other DVD recorders.  
• It may take a few seconds for the thumbnail  
pictures to be displayed.  
DISPLAY  
TIME/TEXT  
• After editing, the title thumbnail picture may  
change to the first scene of the recording (title).  
• After dubbing, the title thumbnail picture set on  
the source recording is cancelled.  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
Press DISPLAY.  
The displays differ depending on the disc  
type or playing status.  
A Title number/name  
(Shows either track number, track  
name, scene number, or file name for  
CDs, VIDEO CDs, DATA DVDs, or  
DATA CDs.)  
,continued  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
z Hints  
B Available functions for DVD VIDEOs  
angle/ audio/ subtitle,  
• If “DTS” of “Audio Connection” is set to “Off” in  
the “Audio” setup, the DTS track selection option  
will not appear on the screen even if the disc  
contains DTS tracks (page 143).  
(
etc.), or playback data for DATA  
DVDs and DATA CDs  
• When “Auto Display” is set to “On” (default) in  
the “Video” setup (page 142), information  
automatically appears on the screen when the  
recorder is operated.  
C The current selected function or audio  
setting (appears only temporarily)  
Example: Dolby Digital 5.1 ch  
Rear (L/R)  
b Note  
Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be  
displayed correctly.  
Checking the playing/  
remaining time  
Front (L/R) +  
Centre  
LFE (Low Frequency  
Effect)  
You can view the playing or time information  
displayed on the front panel display.  
D The current selected angle  
*1  
Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly.  
The displays differ depending on the disc  
type or playing status.  
E Disc type /format (page 10)  
F Title type (only appears for Playlists)  
G Play mode  
Example: When playing a DVD  
H Recording mode (page 79)  
Playing time and number of the  
current title  
*2  
I Playing status bar  
*3  
J Title number (chapter number )  
(Shows either track number, scene  
number, album number , or file  
*3  
Remaining time of the current title  
number for CDs, VIDEO CDs, DATA  
DVDs, or DATA CDs.)  
K Album name appears for DATA DVDs  
or DATA CDs.  
Playing time and number of the  
current chapter  
For CDs with CD text, press TIME/  
TEXT.  
*3  
L Playing time (remaining time )  
Remaining time of the current chapter  
*1  
Displays Super VIDEO CDs as “SVCD,” DATA  
CDs as “CD” and DATA DVDs as “DVD.”  
Does not appear with VIDEO CDs, DATA  
*2  
DVDs, and DATA CDs.  
Displayed when you press TIME/TEXT  
*3  
Example: When playing a VIDEO CD  
repeatedly.  
Playing time and number of the current  
scene or track  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Example: When playing a CD  
Track playing time and the current track/index  
number  
Checking the remaining disc  
space  
m
Remaining time of the current track  
You can check the remaining disc space  
using the “Disc Information” display.  
m
Playing time of the disc  
m
1 Insert a disc.  
Remaining time of the disc  
m
CD text (when available)  
2 Press OPTIONS to select “Disc  
Information,” and press ENTER.  
The “Disc Information” display appears.  
Available settings differ depending on  
the disc type.  
Example: When playing an MP3 audio track  
Playing time and number of the current track  
m
Current album number  
Example: When a DVD+RW is inserted.  
Example: When viewing a JPEG image  
Current file number and total number of files in the  
current album  
m
Current album number and total number of  
albums  
Example: When playing a DivX video file  
Current file number and playing time of the current  
file  
“Remainder” (approximate)  
• The remaining recording time in each  
of the recording modes  
m
Current album number  
• Disc space bar  
• Remaining disc space/total disc space  
b Notes  
• The recorder can only display the first level of a  
CD’s text, such as the disc name.  
• Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be  
displayed correctly.  
z Hints  
• To increase disc space, see “To open up disc  
• You can check the total number and size of JPEG  
image files/MP3 audio tracks on the HDD on the  
“Disc Information” display.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 Press </M/m/, to select the  
character you want to enter, and press  
ENTER.  
5. Changing the Name of  
a Recorded Programme  
The selected character appears at the top  
of the display.  
Example: Input Title Name  
+
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
RW  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
You can label a DVD, title, or programme by  
entering characters. You can enter up to 64  
characters for a title or disc name, but the  
actual number of characters displayed in the  
menus such as the Title List will vary. The  
steps below explain how to change the name  
of the recorded programme.  
The type of characters will change  
according to the language you select in  
“Easy Setup.” Some languages allow you  
to enter an accent mark.  
To enter a letter with an accent mark,  
select an accent followed by the letter.  
Example: Select “ ` ” and then “a” to  
enter “à.”  
Number  
buttons  
INPUT  
SELECT  
To insert a space, select “Space.”  
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter the  
remaining characters.  
Input row  
TITLE LIST  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
2 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
To erase a character, move the cursor to  
the right of the character at the input row.  
Select “Back” and press ENTER.  
To insert a character, move the cursor to  
the right of the point where you want to  
insert the character. Select the character  
and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
3 Select “Title Name,” and press  
ENTER.  
The display for entering characters  
appears.  
4 Press </M/m/, to move the cursor  
to the right of the display and select  
“A” (upper-case), “a” (lower-case),  
or “Symbol,” and press ENTER.  
The characters for the selected type are  
displayed.  
To erase all of the characters, select  
“Clear All” and press ENTER.  
7 Select “Finish,” and press ENTER.  
To cancel the setting, select “Cancel.”  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To use the number buttons  
You can also use the number buttons to enter  
characters. Refer to the number next to each  
row of letters on your TV screen.  
6. Labelling and  
Protecting a Disc  
1
In step 5 above, press a number button  
repeatedly to select a character.  
Example:  
You can execute options effective for the  
entire disc using the “Disc Information”  
display.  
Press the number 3 button once to enter  
“D.”  
Press the number 3 button three times to  
enter “F.”  
2
3
Press ENTER and select the next  
character.  
Select “Finish” and press ENTER.  
z Hint  
You can switch between “A” (upper-case), “a”  
(lower-case), or “Symbol” by pressing INPUT  
SELECT.  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
Labelling a disc  
+
RW  
-
-
+
-
RVR  
RWVR RWVideo  
R
-
RVideo  
1 Insert a disc.  
2 Press OPTIONS to select “Disc  
Information,” and press ENTER.  
The “Disc Information” display appears.  
Available settings differ depending on  
the disc type.  
Example: When the inserted disc is a  
DVD+RW.  
,continued  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 Select “Disc Name,” and press  
ENTER.  
7. Playing the Disc on  
Other DVD Equipment  
(Finalise)  
Enter the disc name in the “Input Disc  
Name” display (page 42).  
b Note  
+
-
-
+
R
-
RVR  
RWVR RWVideo  
RW  
You can enter up to 64 characters for a DVD’s disc  
name. The disc name may not appear when the disc  
is played on other DVD equipment.  
-
RVideo  
Finalising is necessary when you play discs  
recorded with this recorder on other DVD  
equipment.  
When you finalise a DVD+RW, DVD-RW  
(Video mode), DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video  
mode), a DVD menu will be automatically  
created, which can be displayed on other  
DVD equipment.  
Protecting a disc  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
1 Insert a disc.  
Before finalising, check the differences  
between the disc types in the table below.  
2 Press OPTIONS to select “Disc  
Information,” and press ENTER.  
The “Disc Information” display appears.  
Available settings differ depending on  
the disc type.  
Differences between the disc types  
Discs are automatically finalised  
+
RW  
when removed from the recorder.  
However, you may need to finalise  
the disc for certain DVD  
Example: When the inserted disc is a  
DVD-RW (VR mode).  
equipment, or if the recording time  
is short. You can edit or record on  
the disc even after finalising.  
Finalising is unnecessary when  
playing a disc on VR format  
compatible equipment.  
-
RWVR  
Even if your other DVD equipment  
is VR format compatible, you may  
need to finalise the disc, especially  
if the recording time is short. You  
can edit or record on the disc even  
after finalising.  
A
“On”/“Off”: Indicates whether  
protection is set (DVD-RW/DVD-  
R in VR mode only)  
Finalising is necessary when  
playing on any equipment other  
than this recorder.  
-
RWVideo  
B “Protect Disc”  
After finalising, you cannot edit or  
record on the disc. If you want to  
record on it again, unfinalise  
(page 46) or reformat the disc  
(page 46). However, if you  
reformat the disc, all recorded  
contents will be erased.  
3 Select “Protect Disc,” and press  
ENTER.  
4 Select “Protect,” and press ENTER.  
To cancel the protection  
Select “Unprotected” in step 4.  
Finalising is necessary. The disc  
can be played only on equipment  
that supports DVD-R in VR mode.  
After finalising you cannot edit or  
record on the disc using this  
recorder.  
-
RVR  
z Hint  
You can set protection for individual titles  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Finalising is necessary when  
playing on any equipment other  
than this recorder.  
After finalising, you cannot edit or  
record on the disc.  
+
R
Finalising the disc using “Disc  
Information” display  
-
RVideo  
1 Insert a disc.  
2 Press OPTIONS to select “Disc  
Information,” and press ENTER.  
The “Disc Information” display appears.  
Z (open/  
close)  
3 Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER.  
The display shows the approximate time  
required for finalising and asks for  
confirmation.  
(Example: DVD+RW)  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
Finalising the disc using Z  
(open/close) button  
4 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts finalising the disc.  
1 Make a recording.  
z Hint  
You can check whether the disc has been finalised  
or not. If you cannot select “Finalise” in step 3  
above, the disc has already been finalised.  
2 Press Z (open/close).  
The display shows the approximate time  
required for finalising and asks for  
confirmation.  
b Notes  
For DVD+RWs, the recorder  
automatically starts finalising the disc.  
After finalising, the disc will be ejected  
automatically.  
• Depending on the condition of the disc,  
recording, or the DVD equipment, discs may not  
play even if the discs are finalised.  
• The recorder may not be able to finalise the disc  
if it was recorded on another recorder.  
• Inserting an unfinalised disc into other DVD  
equipment may damage the recorded contents.  
3 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts finalising the disc.  
After finalising, the disc will be ejected  
automatically.  
,continued  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Unfinalising a disc  
8. Reformatting a Disc  
-
-
RWVR RWVideo  
+
RW  
-
-
RWVR RWVideo  
For DVD-RWs (Video mode)  
DVD-RWs (Video mode) that have been  
finalised to prohibit additional recording or  
editing can be unfinalised to allow further  
recording or editing.  
New discs are automatically formatted when  
inserted. If necessary, you can manually re-  
format a DVD+RW or DVD-RW disc to  
make a blank disc. For DVD-RWs, you can  
select a recording format (VR mode or Video  
mode) according to your needs (page 101).  
For DVD-RWs (VR mode)  
If you cannot record or edit on a DVD-RW  
(VR mode) that has been finalised with other  
DVD equipment, unfinalise the disc.  
b Note  
The recorder is not able to unfinalise DVD-RWs  
(Video mode) that have been finalised on another  
recorder.  
1 Insert a disc.  
</M/m/,,  
2 Press OPTIONS to select “Disc  
Information,” and press ENTER.  
The “Disc Information” display appears.  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
3 Select “Unfinalise,” and press  
ENTER.  
The recorder starts unfinalising the disc.  
Unfinalising may take several minutes.  
1 Insert a disc.  
2 Press OPTIONS to select “Disc  
Information,” and press ENTER.  
Example: When a DVD+RW is inserted.  
3 Select “Format,” and press ENTER.  
4 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
5 Select “Video” or “Photo,” and press  
ENTER.  
If you select “Video,” and want to format  
DVD-RWs and unrecorded DVD-Rs  
(Video mode), select “VR” or “Video,”  
and press ENTER.  
Select “Photo” if you want to copy JPEG  
image files.  
All contents on the disc are erased.  
z Hints  
• By reformatting, you can change the recording  
format on DVD-RWs, or record again on DVD-  
RWs that have been finalised.  
• You can format DATA DVDs to copy JPEG  
image files from the HDD.  
b Note  
On this model, 1 GB (read “gigabyte”) is equivalent  
to 1 billion bytes. The larger the number, the larger  
the disc space.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1 Press GUIDE  
.
This display consists of an information  
box and a ten channel programme list  
covering a two hour period.  
Guide to Digital Services  
(For Freeview users only)  
EPG (Electronic  
Programme Guide)  
Example of EPG Display:  
The Electronic Programme Guide is a guide  
showing the television programme schedule  
for a day or more at a time on your television  
(via the Digital Terrestrial Television tuner  
included in this recorder).  
The EPG provides a quick and easy way to:  
• View a complete list of all available  
channels.  
A Indicates the TV or Radio mode.  
• View a channel list related to a chosen  
category.  
• Set a programme to be recorded (page 59).  
The Radio mode is indicated by a  
Radio icon  
.
B Indicates the Local Channel.  
Number and the Channel name of  
the programme that is currently  
selected in the list.  
b Note  
Digital Services availability and content depend on  
the broadcaster.  
Digital Services are not instantly available when the  
recorder is first turned on.  
C Indicates the currently selected  
programme and allows you to  
move around the list.  
Viewing a list of available  
channels  
D Channel name  
E Indicates the currently viewed  
programme.  
F Indicates if a timer recording is  
associated with the event  
Number  
buttons  
G Colour buttons  
Colour  
buttons  
GUIDE  
H Truncated programme title in case  
the name is too long to be  
displayed in the cell.  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
I Event bar (e.g. Indicates a timer  
recording has been set during this  
time)  
O
RETURN  
.
PAGE  
/
>
J Time slot  
TV/RADIO  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
K Icon tray  
Depending on the channel and  
Available buttons in the EPG display  
Buttons  
Operations  
programme settings, some icons  
may appear in the display:  
: Either the channel or the  
programme is locked (page 136).  
: Timer event icons  
PAGE  
/
Display the previous/next  
ten channels.  
./>  
View the next or previous  
24-hour programme  
schedule.  
: Series Recording icon (page 60)  
The green button Toggle the display as  
follows:  
L Indicates the current time and date.  
2-hour schedule (half hour  
time shots) y 30-minute  
schedule (15 minutes time  
shots).  
2 Press </M/m/, or enter a channel  
number using the number buttons to  
move around the list.  
The yellow  
button  
Display the channel for the  
selected programme  
If you press , after selecting the last  
programme on the right, the schedule for  
the next two hours is displayed  
(depending on availability from the  
broadcaster).  
The red button  
(Category)  
Search for programmes by  
category  
TV/RADIO  
Switch between TV and  
Radio channels.  
O
RETURN  
Close the EPG display.  
Viewing programmes related to  
a specific category  
This feature allows you to search for  
programmes related to a particular topic.  
For example, if you select “News” from the  
category pop-up list, then only programmes  
related to News will be shown in the EPG.  
3 Select a programme, and press  
ENTER.  
The full screen dialogue appears with the  
description of the programme displayed  
in the information box.  
b Note  
The category of each programme is determined by  
the broadcaster.  
4 Select “View Programme,”and press  
ENTER.  
Colour  
buttons  
GUIDE  
M/m,  
ENTER  
PAGE  
/
,continued  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1 Press GUIDE  
.
Programme Information  
2 Press the red button.  
The category pop-up list appears.  
The programme information display provides  
a quick and easy way to:  
• View descriptions of the programmes being  
broadcast now and next on the current  
channel.  
• View descriptions of the programmes being  
broadcast now and next on the other  
channels.  
• Switch between TV and RADIO channels.  
3 Press M/m to select a category, and  
press ENTER.  
Number  
buttons  
The selected category is displayed in a  
title bar at the top of the EPG display and  
only programmes related to that category  
will be shown in the list.  
Some examples of category types are  
as follows:  
All Programmes: This gives a complete  
channel list.  
INFO/  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
Films: Displays movies available for  
viewing.  
PAGE  
News: Displays all news channels.  
Entertainment: Displays all  
entertainment channels.  
/
Sports: Displays all sports channels.  
Kids: Displays all children’s channels.  
Music: Displays all music channels.  
Displaying the programme  
information  
4 Press M/m to select a programme,  
and press ENTER.  
Press INFO/  
.
The sub menu appears with the  
description of the programme displayed  
in the information box.  
The Information display appears showing a  
description of the current programme on  
view.  
5 Select “View Programme,” and press  
ENTER.  
To scroll the Category display by page  
(Page mode)  
Press PAGE  
/
while the Category  
display is turned on to change to the previous/  
next Category page.  
z Hint  
In step 4 above, the EPG application also allows  
you to set a timer recording. For more details, see  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Available buttons in the Information  
display  
Viewing a Digital Text  
Service  
Buttons  
Operations  
PAGE  
/
Scroll the information  
display by page  
Many digital TV channels broadcast  
information via their text service. This digital  
service includes high quality digital text and  
graphics along with advanced navigation  
options. Additionally, this recorder has  
access to dedicated text channels transmitted  
by the broadcasters.  
</,  
Toggle the display between  
description of the current/  
next programme  
M/m or  
the number  
buttons  
Display programme  
information for other  
channels  
Toggle the Favourites List  
View the selected channel  
b Note  
The appearance, content and navigation methods of  
all digital text services are decided by the  
broadcaster.  
ENTER  
PROG +/–  
Number  
buttons  
Colour  
buttons  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
Selecting digital text from  
dedicated digital teletext  
channels  
1 Select a dedicated channel that is  
broadcasting digital text.  
You can search for a dedicated digital  
text channel using the “Electronic  
Programme Guide” (page 48).  
The text page is displayed.  
,continued  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 Once the text page is displayed (this  
may take some time), follow the on-  
screen instructions to obtain your  
required selection.  
Favourites  
The Favourite application gives you the  
option to:  
• Store your favourite channels into one of  
four TV or four Radio lists.  
• Add or delete channels to the Favourites  
List.  
• Quickly display a favourite channel.  
• All receivable channels are automatically  
stored in the Favourites List.  
On some pages the TV programme may  
also be displayed on the text screen. On-  
screen instructions will inform you how  
to change the displayed programme.  
If you are instructed to press “OK” or  
“Select” when viewing the text pages,  
press ENTER.  
To exit the text service  
Follow the on screen instructions, or press  
PROG +/–.  
Selecting digital text from  
other channels  
Colour  
buttons  
SYSTEM  
Digital text services may also be available on  
other digital channels. This is sometimes  
indicated by a small symbol on your TV  
screen, superimposed on the programme you  
are watching.  
MENU  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
PAGE  
/
1 Select a channel.  
2 Press  
(Text) or the button  
indicated on screen by the  
broadcaster.  
The text information appears.  
TV/RADIO  
3 Access required information using  
</M/m/,, the colour buttons and/  
or the number buttons.  
Setting the Favourites List  
If you are instructed to press “OK” or  
“Select” when viewing the text pages,  
press ENTER.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu Display appears.  
2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.  
The Setup Display appears.  
To exit the text service  
Follow the on screen instructions, or press  
PROG +/–.  
3 Select “DTV Settings,” and press  
ENTER.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 Select “Favourites,” and press  
ENTER.  
Watching or listening to a  
favourite channel  
“Favourites List 1” display appears.  
Press  
repeatedly to switch to a  
different Favourites List.  
1 While in normal operation mode,  
press  
repeatedly to select a list.  
Then press ENTER.  
The selected Favourites List display  
appears.  
Indicates the currently viewed channel  
This display shows all the TV or Radio  
channels available to you.  
5 Press TV/RADIO to display either your  
favourite TV or favourite Radio  
channels at any time.  
The Radio mode is indicated by the  
presence of a Radio icon  
Favourites List panel.  
in the  
2 Press TV/RADIO to display either your  
favourite TV or favourite Radio  
channels at any time.  
6 Press M/m or enter a channel number  
to select a channel you want to delete  
as a favourite, and press ENTER.  
Press ENTER again to add the channel  
back to the Favourites List.  
The Radio mode is indicated by the  
presence of a Radio icon  
Favourites List panel.  
in the  
3 Press  
to switch to a different  
Favourites List.  
4 Press M/m to select the channel you  
want to view or listen to, and press  
ENTER.  
If you do not want to choose from one of  
the channels in the display, press the red  
or green button to view the previous or  
next available channels.  
To scroll the Favourites List display by  
page (Page mode)  
Press PAGE  
/
while the Favourites  
List display is turned on to change to the  
previous/next page.  
z Hints  
• Press the blue button to view the list showing only  
your favourite channels.  
• Press the blue button once again when you wish  
to return to the previous favourite channel setting  
display.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 Press M/m to select the desired  
channel, then press ENTER to exit the  
index menu and view the selected  
channel.  
Index  
The Index application is an easy way to  
display a scrollable list of all the tuned  
channels, including your favourites channel  
lists, and allows one of these to be selected.  
To scroll the Index display by page (Page  
mode)  
Press PAGE  
/
while the Index display  
is turned on to change to the previous/next  
page.  
M/m,  
ENTER  
PAGE  
/
TV/RADIO  
1 While in normal operation mode,  
press ENTER.  
The Index display for the last display you  
viewed appears. For instance, if the last  
display you viewed was the Favourites  
List, then the Favourites List appears.  
2 Press  
to switch between the  
Programme List.  
3
Press TV/RADIO to display either the  
TV or the Radio channels at any time.  
The Radio mode is indicated by the  
presence of a Radio icon  
panel.  
in the Index  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the  
recording modes.  
Timer Recording  
(For Freeview users only)  
To select the HQ+ mode, set “HQ Setting” of  
the “HDD Rec. Settings” to “HQ+” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 146). “HQ+”  
records pictures in higher quality than HQ on  
the HDD. Note that HQ+ appears as HQ in  
the front panel display and the on-screen  
displays.  
Before Recording  
Before you start recording…  
• Check that the disc has enough available  
space for the recording (page 41). For the  
HDD, DVD+RWs, and DVD-RWs, you  
can free up disc space by erasing titles  
Approx. recording  
time (hours)  
Recording mode  
HDD  
DVD*  
HQ+ (High quality) 32  
1
• Adjust the recording picture quality and  
picture size if necessary (page 62).  
HQ  
R
R
50  
72  
HSP  
1 hr.  
30 min.  
z Hint  
Timer recordings will be made regardless whether  
or not the recorder is turned on. You can turn off the  
recorder without affecting the recording even after  
recording starts.  
SP (Standard mode) 96  
2
LSP  
r
120  
2 hr.  
30 min.  
b Notes  
ESP  
LP  
r
r
r
144  
193  
291  
3
4
6
8
• To play a recorded disc on other DVD equipment,  
finalise the disc (page 44).  
• If digital teletext is operated while recording, its  
contents will be recorded on the disc.  
• If the subtitles are displayed while recording, they  
will be recorded on the disc.  
EP  
SLP (Long duration) 387  
* The recording time for DVD+R DL (Double  
Layer) discs is as follows:  
HQ: 1 hour 48 minutes  
HSP: 2 hours 42 minutes  
SP: 3 hours 37 minutes  
LSP: 4 hours 31 minutes  
ESP: 5 hours 25 minutes  
LP: 7 hours 14 minutes  
EP: 10 hours 51 minutes  
SLP: 14 hours 28 minutes  
Recording mode  
Like the standard ×3 recording modes of  
video tapes, you can select the desired  
recording mode using the REC MODE  
button.  
Recording modes with higher quality provide  
a more beautiful recording, but the large data  
volume also results in a shorter recording  
time.  
b Notes  
• The maximum continuous recording time for a  
single title is eight hours.  
Conversely, a longer duration provides a  
longer recording time, but the lower data  
volume results in a coarser picture quality.  
• Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies  
with the recording time.  
– Recording a programme with poor reception, or  
a programme or video source of low picture  
quality  
– Recording on a disc that has already been edited  
– Recording only a still picture or just sound  
,continued  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Unrecordable pictures  
Timer Recording  
(Standard/EPG)  
Pictures with copy protection cannot be  
recorded on this recorder.  
When the recorder receives a copy guard  
signal, the recorder continues to record but  
only a blank, grey coloured screen will be  
recorded.  
+
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
RW  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
You can set the timer for a total of 40  
programmes, up to 30 days in advance.  
There are three methods to set the timer: the  
standard method, EPG method and Series  
Recording method.  
• Standard: Set the date, time, and  
programme position of the programme  
manually.  
Copy control Recordable discs  
signals  
Copy-Free  
+
RW  
-
RWVR  
HDD  
-
+
R
-
RVR  
RWVideo  
-
RVideo  
• EPG: Set a programme to be recorded based  
on the information provided by the EPG  
(Electronic Programme Guide) (page 59).  
• Series Recording: Automatically sets the  
recorder to record programmes in a series  
Copy-Once  
Copy-Never  
HDD  
-
RWVR  
(CPRM*)  
(CPRM*)  
-
RVR  
None (a blank screen is  
recorded)  
* The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM  
compatible equipment (page 10).  
Setting the timer manually  
(Standard)  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
[TIMER]  
x REC  
STOP  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
1 Press [TIMER].  
4 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The “TIMER LIST” display (page 64)  
appears. The TIMER REC indicator  
lights up on the front panel and the  
recorder is ready to start recording.  
Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn off  
the recorder before the timer recording  
starts.  
To stop recording during timer recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
2 Press M/m to select the “Day and  
Time” or “Mode” row. Then press  
ENTER.  
3 Select an item using </, and  
adjust using M/m. Then press ENTER.  
To make additional changes to items in  
different rows, return to step 2. The  
adjustable items are listed below.  
“Day and Time”:  
Rec. Mode Adjust  
If there is not enough available disc space for  
the recording, the recorder automatically  
adjusts the recording mode to enable the  
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.  
Mode Adjust” of the “Timer Settings” to  
“On” in the “Recording” setup (page 146).  
Sets the date, start time, and stop time,  
and selects the programme position or  
input source.  
The date item changes as follows:  
Today y …… y Sat 28.10 (30 days  
later) y Sun (every Sunday) y ……  
y Sat (every Saturday) y Mon - Fri  
(Monday to Friday) y Mon - Sat  
(Monday to Saturday) y Daily y  
Today  
Auto Title Erase (HDD only)  
If there is not enough space for a timer  
recording, the recorder automatically erases  
old titles recorded on the HDD. The oldest  
played title is erased. Set “Auto Title Erase”  
of the “Timer Settings” to “On” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 146). Protected  
titles are not erased.  
“Mode”:  
Selects the recording mode (page 55).  
“Media”:  
Selects the media, HDD or DVD.  
“Update” (HDD only):  
If the timer settings overlap  
Overlapped timer settings are shown as  
follows.  
Automatically records over a previously  
recorded programme that is set to be  
recorded, daily or weekly.  
“Extend Time”:  
Sets the duration in increments of 10  
minutes, for a maximum of 60 minutes  
when a timer recording is in progress. If  
the programme set to be recorded daily or  
weekly is extended, the manually  
extended time set here will be added to  
the subsequent timer recording times.  
• If you make a mistake, select the item  
and change the setting.  
To store the setting as shown, select “OK.”  
The programme that has a  
mark next to it  
has lower priority and will not be entirely  
recorded.  
To cancel the overlapped setting, select  
“Cancel.”  
To confirm, change, or cancel a timer  
recording  
,continued  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
b Notes  
To extend the recording duration time  
while recording  
• If a message indicating that the disc is full appears  
on the screen, change the disc, or make available  
space for the recording (HDD/DVD+RW/DVD-  
1
Press OPTIONS during recording to  
select “Extend Rec.,” and press ENTER.  
• Check that the clock is correctly set before setting  
the timer recording. If not, the timer recording  
cannot be made.  
• To record a satellite programme, turn on the  
satellite tuner and select the satellite programme  
you want to record. Leave the satellite tuner  
turned on until the recorder finishes recording. If  
you connect equipment with a timer function, you  
can use the Synchro Rec function (page 67).  
• Even if the timer is set for the same daily or  
weekly programme, the timer recording cannot be  
made if it overlaps with a programme that has  
2
3
Press M/m to select the duration time.  
You can set the duration in increments of  
10 minutes, for a maximum of 60  
minutes.  
priority. “  
” will appear next to the overlapped  
setting in the Timer List. Check the priority order  
of the settings.  
• Even if the timer is set, timer recordings cannot be  
made while recording a programme that has  
priority.  
• The Rec Mode Adjust function only works with a  
timer recording. It does not function with Quick  
Timer or Synchro Rec. In addition, the Rec Mode  
Adjust function does not work when recording to  
the HDD while “Auto Title Erase” of the “Timer  
Settings” is set to “On” in the “Recording” setup  
Select “OK” and press ENTER.  
One Touch Timer  
If you use the SMARTLINK connection, you  
can easily display the timer programming  
menu.  
When the TV is turned on or in standby  
mode, press [TIMER]. The recorder  
automatically turns on and the TV’s input is  
switched to the recorder. The Timer  
programming menu appears.  
z Hint  
If you are recording to the HDD or a DVD-RW (VR  
mode) at a recording mode that is SP or lower and  
is a 2x-speed or higher disc, you can play the title as  
it is being recorded by selecting the programme title  
on the Title List (page 95).  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 Press ENTER.  
Recording TV programmes  
using the EPG  
The sub menu appears with the  
description of the programme displayed  
in the information box.  
The EPG function is a feature that simplifies  
setting the timer. Just select the programme  
you want to record in the EPG display. The  
date, time, and channel of that programme are  
set automaically.  
HDD  
DVD  
Number  
buttons  
indicates that the programme is age  
limited (page 136).  
5 Select “Timer,” and press ENTER.  
• In case of a current TV/radio broadcast  
timer setting, your recorder will  
immediately start recording.  
GUIDE  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
• In case of a future programme timer  
setting, an event bar and a new icon  
appear in the EPG display indicating  
that a timer event is associated with that  
programme.  
PAGE  
/
x REC  
STOP  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
When you record to a DVD, insert a  
recordable DVD (see “1. Inserting a  
2 Press GUIDE  
.
Your recorder will automatically begin  
recording when the programme starts.  
To modify the timer setting, see page 64.  
Some examples of timer event icon  
types are:  
(red): Indicates that the whole  
programme is set to be recorded.  
(grey): Indicates that the programme  
is set to be recorded, but only a part or  
none of the programme can be recorded  
(e.g. because of timer setting overlap).  
(red): Indicates the programme is now  
recording.  
3 Select a programme using </M/m/  
, or the number buttons.  
To know more about the navigation  
options in the EPG application, see  
,continued  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To scroll the EPG display by page (Page  
mode)  
Recording programmes using  
Series Recording  
Press PAGE  
/
while the EPG display  
is turned on to display the previous/next ten  
channels.  
Series Recording is a feature which uses  
information from the Electronic Programme  
Guide to provide the following features:  
• Automatically record programmes in a  
series.  
To stop recording during timer recording  
Press x REC STOP. Note that it may take a  
few seconds for the recorder to stop  
recording.  
• Record the subsequent parts of events  
which are split.  
If the timer settings overlap  
See page 57.  
• Provide links to recommended  
programmes.  
b Notes  
To extend the recording duration time  
while recording (Guide Timer Extend)  
See page 58.  
• This function cannot be used when the  
broadcaster does not include series information  
with the programme data.  
• Whether or not a programme is in a series is  
determined by the broadcaster.  
To confirm, change, or cancel timer  
recording  
Number  
buttons  
z Hint  
The Rec Mode Adjust function also works with this  
timer method (page 57).  
Colour  
buttons  
b Notes  
• This recorder is featured with an EPG timer auto  
extend functionality that allows EPG timer  
recordings to be made in case of an early start  
(before the scheduled start time) or late finish  
(after the scheduled end time).  
GUIDE  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
O
RETURN  
• The EPG programme start and end time are  
determined by the broadcaster.  
z REC  
1 Press GUIDE  
.
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 Select a programme containing series  
information using </M/m/, or the  
number buttons.  
5 Select “Series Timer.”  
The selected programme is set for  
recording and appears in the Timer List  
(page 65). The other programmes in the  
series will be set for recording (appear in  
the Timer List) as each previous  
recording is completed.  
The “Series Info” appears under the blue  
bar at the bottom of the EPG screen when  
the programme contains series  
information.  
For example, if there are three  
3 Press the blue button (“Series Info”).  
The Series Information display appears.  
Press the red button to display the  
Programme Guide and see more  
information about the selected  
programme. Press O RETURN to  
return.  
programmes in a series, the second  
programme will be set for recording only  
after the first recording is finished. The  
third programme will be set for recording  
only after the second recording is  
finished.  
Confirming Series Recording settings  
After you have set a programme for Series  
Recording, the following icons appear in the  
Series Information display.  
(Series):  
Indicates that the programme is a candidate  
for Series Recording recording.  
(Link):  
Indicates that the series has been set for  
Series Recording.  
(repeat):  
Indicates a repeat programme.  
b Notes  
(Recommended):  
• If a program is not completely recorded then the  
repeat will be recorded.  
The event is recommended by  
broadcaster as a link for current series.  
Note that recommended programmes  
will not be automatically set for  
recording with Series Recording.  
• Series Recordings may overlap with EPG or  
manual timer settings. Check timer settings using  
the Timer List (page 64).  
Recording Split Programmes  
Movies and other programmes that are split  
into 2 or more parts are called Split  
4 Press ENTER.  
Programmes. If you set the timer for one part  
of a Split Programme, the other parts are  
automatically recorded. For example, if the  
first half is set to be recorded, the last half  
will be recorded automatically.  
b Note  
Only the earliest part of the Split Programme is  
displayed on the Timer List.  
,continued  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Quick Timer function  
Adjusting the recording picture  
quality and size  
You can set the recorder to record in  
30 minute increments.  
You can adjust the recording picture quality  
and picture size.  
Press z REC repeatedly to set the  
duration.  
Each press advances the time in 30 minute  
increments. The maximum duration is six  
hours.  
(normal recording)  
The time counter decreases minute by minute  
to 0:00, then the recorder stops recording (the  
power does not turn off). Even if you turn off  
the recorder during recording, the recorder  
continues to record until the time counter  
runs out.  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
Note that the Quick Timer function does not  
work if “TV Direct Rec.” is set to “On” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 146).  
1 Before recording starts, press  
OPTIONS to select “Rec. Settings,”  
and press ENTER.  
To cancel the Quick Timer  
Press z REC repeatedly until the counter  
appears in the front panel display. The  
recorder returns to normal recording mode.  
2 Select the item you want to adjust,  
and press ENTER.  
The adjustment display appears.  
Example: Rec. NR  
“Rec. Mode”:  
Selects the recording mode for the  
desired recording time and picture  
quality. For more information, see  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
b Notes  
“HDD Rec. Picture Size”/“DVD Rec.  
Picture Size”:  
Sets the picture size of the programme to  
be recorded.  
• 4 : 3 (default): Sets the picture size to  
4:3.  
• 16 : 9: Sets the picture size to 16:9  
(wide mode).  
• For HDD/DVD-RWs (VR mode), if “TV Type”  
of “Video Output” is set to “16:9” in the “Video”  
setup (page 140), the picture is recorded as 16:9  
regardless of the setting for “HDD Rec. Picture  
Size” or “DVD Rec. Picture Size.”  
• If one programme contains two picture sizes, the  
selected size is recorded. However, if the 16:9  
signal cannot be recorded as 16:9, it is recorded as  
4:3.  
• When playing a 16:9 size picture recorded as 4:3,  
the image is fixed to 4:3 Letter Box regardless of  
the setting in “TV Type” of “Video” setup  
• Remnants of images may appear on your screen  
when using “Rec. NR.”  
• “Rec. Video Equalizer” does not affect the input  
of the DV IN jack or digital TV pictures and does  
not work with RGB signals.  
• Auto (HDD only): Automatically  
selects the actual picture size.  
“DVD Rec. Picture Size” works with  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode)  
when the recording mode is set to HQ,  
HSP, SP, LSP, or ESP. For all other  
recording modes, the screen size is fixed  
at “4 : 3.”  
For DVD-Rs/DVD-RWs (VR mode), the  
actual picture size is recorded regardless  
of the setting. For example, if a 16:9 size  
picture is received, the disc records the  
picture as 16:9 even if “DVD Rec.  
Picture Size” is set to “4 : 3.”  
Creating chapters in a title  
The recorder can automatically divide a  
recording (a title) into chapters by inserting  
chapter marks at approximately 6 minute  
intervals during recording. To disable this  
function, set “Auto Chapter” in the  
“Recording” setup to “Off” (page 146).  
When recording to the HDD, a DVD-R (VR  
mode) or a DVD-RW (VR mode), you can  
insert and erase chapter marks manually  
For DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, the screen  
size is fixed at “4 : 3.”  
“Rec. NR” (noise reduction): Reduces  
noise contained in the video signal.  
“Rec. Video Equalizer”: Adjusts the  
picture in greater detail.  
Press M/m to select the item you want to  
adjust, then press ENTER.  
• Contrast: Changes the contrast.  
• Brightness: Changes the overall  
brightness.  
b Note  
When dubbing (page 109), the chapter marks in the  
dubbing source are not retained in the dubbed title.  
• Colour: Makes the colours deeper or  
lighter.  
3 Adjust the setting using </M/m/,,  
and press ENTER.  
The default setting is underlined.  
“Rec. NR”: (weak) Off 1 ~ 2 ~ 3  
(strong)  
“Rec. Video Equalizer”:  
• Contrast: (weak) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (strong)  
• Brightness: (dark) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (bright)  
• Colour: (light) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (deep)  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust any other  
items.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
2 Press </M/m/, to select a future  
timer event you want to check/change/  
cancel. Then press ENTER.  
Checking/Changing/  
Cancelling Timer  
Settings  
The Event Action menu appears.  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVR  
RVideo  
There are two ways to check, change or  
cancel the timer settings.  
• Using the EPG  
• Using the Timer List  
3 Press M/m to select an option. Then  
press ENTER.  
The sub menu appears:  
“Modify”:  
Changes the timer setting.  
Select an item using </, and adjust  
using M/m. Select “OK” and press  
ENTER.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
GUIDE  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
O
RETURN  
/
“Erase”:  
Erases the timer setting.  
Checking/changing/cancelling  
using the EPG  
“Check Overlap”:  
Checks for overlapped settings.  
1 Press GUIDE  
.
A timer setting can be identified using  
the event bar and the timer event icon  
displayed in the EPG display. For details,  
Select “Close” to return to the EPG  
display.  
To change or cancel the setting, repeat  
steps 2 and 3 above.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
b Note  
3 Select the timer setting you want to  
check/change/cancel, and press  
ENTER.  
If you set “Repeat Rec.” to any option other than  
“Off” in step 3, your EPG timer recording will be  
converted into a standard timer recording. The  
timer event icon disappears from the EPG display.  
The sub-menu appears.  
4 Select one of the options, and press  
ENTER.  
Checking/changing/cancelling  
using the Timer List  
“Modify”:  
Changes the timer setting.  
Select an item using </, and adjust  
using M/m. Select “OK” and press  
ENTER.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “TIMER LIST,” and press  
ENTER.  
The Timer List appears.  
“Erase”:  
Erases the timer setting.  
Select “OK” and press ENTER.  
Timer information displays the recording  
date, time, recording mode, etc.  
:
Indicates that the setting is overlapped by  
another setting.  
(red):  
z
Indicates the setting currently being  
recorded.  
“Check Overlap”:  
Checks for overlapped settings.  
:
Indicates that the timer recording cannot  
be recorded as set, such as for a timer  
recording that cannot be recorded in the  
selected recording mode.  
:
Indicates the setting is being recorded to  
the HDD.  
:
Select “Close” to return to the Timer List.  
Indicates the setting is being recorded to  
a DVD.  
:
Indicates the setting that the Update  
function is set for.  
When all of the timer settings do not fit  
on the list, the scroll bar appears.  
To view the hidden timer settings, press  
M/m.  
,continued  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
“Info”:  
To scroll the list display by page (Page  
mode)  
Displays the timer setting information  
box along with the disc space required to  
record the whole programme (according  
to the selected recording mode).  
Press  
/
while the list display is turned  
, the entire  
on. Each time you press  
/
Timer List changes to the next/previous page  
of timer settings.  
To turn off the Timer List  
Press O RETURN.  
z Hint  
For manual timer settings, you cannot modify the  
timer setting for the current recording, but you can  
extend the duration of the recording time while  
recording (page 58).  
For timer settings using the EPG, you can modify  
the timer setting for the current recording while  
recording, but you cannot extend the duration of the  
recording (even when recording is stopped).  
Press O RETURN to return to the  
Timer List.  
To change or cancel the setting, repeat  
steps 3 and 4 above.  
b Notes  
• Even if the timer is set, timer recordings cannot be  
made while recording a programme that has  
priority.  
When the timer settings overlap  
The programme set last has priority.  
• Even if the timer is set for the same daily or  
weekly programme, the timer recording cannot be  
made if it overlaps with a programme that has  
Example: You set the timer in order of A, B,  
and C (setting C has first priority)  
priority. “  
” will appear next to the overlapped  
setting in the Timer List. Check the priority order  
of the settings.  
will be cut off  
Actual recording  
If the end time of one recording and the  
start time of another are the same  
The end of programme A will be cut off.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to  
select “L3.”  
Recording from  
4 Select the desired audio signal when  
recording a bilingual programme to  
the HDD or DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR  
mode).  
Connected Equipment  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
Press OPTIONS to select “Line Audio  
Input,” and press ENTER. Then select  
“Bilingual,” and press ENTER.  
HDD  
DVD  
5 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select  
the recording mode.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
For details about the recording mode, see  
6 Set the timer on the connected  
equipment to the time of the  
programme you want to record, and  
turn it off.  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
7 Press c z SYNCHRO REC.  
The SYNCHRO REC indicator lights up  
on the front panel. The recorder is ready  
to start Synchro-Recording.  
OPTIONS  
The recorder automatically starts  
recording when it receives an input  
signal from the connected equipment.  
The recorder stops recording when the  
connected equipment turns off.  
REC MODE  
c z  
SYNCHRO  
REC  
z REC  
x REC  
STOP  
Recording from connected  
equipment with a timer  
(Synchro Rec)  
To stop recording  
Press x REC STOP or c z SYNCHRO  
REC.  
To cancel Synchro Rec  
You can set the recorder to automatically  
record programmes from connected  
equipment that has a timer function (such as  
a satellite tuner). Connect the equipment to  
the LINE 3/DECODER jack of the recorder  
Press c z SYNCHRO REC.  
The SYNCHRO REC indicator on the  
recorder turns off.  
When the connected equipment turns on, the  
recorder starts recording a programme from  
the LINE 3/DECODER jack.  
1 Before recording, select HDD or DVD.  
If you select DVD, insert a recordable  
2 Set “Synchro Rec.” to “Record to  
HDD” or “Record to DVD” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 146).  
,continued  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
b Notes  
2 Press INPUT SELECT to select an input  
source according to the connection  
you made.  
• The recorder starts recording only after detecting  
a special control signal from the connected  
equipment. The beginning of the programme may  
not be recorded regardless of whether or not the  
recorder’s power is on or off.  
The front panel display changes as  
follows:  
programme  
position  
• During Synchro-Recording, other operations,  
such as normal recording, cannot be performed.  
• To use the connected equipment while the  
recorder is standing by for Synchro-Recording,  
cancel Synchro-Recording by pressing c z  
SYNCHRO REC. Be sure to turn off the  
connected equipment and press c z SYNCHRO  
REC to reset Synchro-Recording before the timer  
recording starts.  
3 Select the desired audio signal when  
recording a bilingual programme to  
the HDD or DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR  
mode).  
• The Synchro Rec function does not work with  
some tuners. For details, see the tuner’s operating  
instructions.  
Press OPTIONS to select “Line Audio  
Input,” and press ENTER. Then select  
“Bilingual,” and press ENTER.  
4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select  
If the timer settings of a Synchro-  
Recording and another timer recording  
overlap  
Regardless of whether or not the programme  
is a Synchro Rec programme, the programme  
that starts first has priority and the second  
programme starts recording only after the  
first programme has finished.  
the recording mode.  
For details about the recording mode, see  
5 Insert the source tape into the  
connected equipment and set to  
playback pause.  
6 Press z REC.  
This recorder starts recording.  
First  
programme  
7 Press the pause (or play) button on the  
connected equipment to cancel the  
playback pause status.  
Second  
programme  
will be cut off  
The connected equipment starts playback  
and the playback image is recorded by  
this recorder.  
To stop recording, press x REC STOP  
on this recorder.  
Recording from connected  
equipment without a timer  
You can record from a connected VCR or  
similar device. To connect a VCR or similar  
Device” on page 30. Use the DV IN jack on  
the front panel if the equipment has a DV  
output jack (i.LINK jack).  
If you connect a digital video camera with  
a DV IN jack  
explanation of how to record from the DV IN  
jack.  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
If you select DVD, insert a recordable  
page 35).  
z Hint  
You can adjust the settings for the recording picture  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
b Notes  
• When recording a video game image, the screen  
may not be clear.  
• Any programme that contains a Copy-Never copy  
guard signal cannot be recorded. The recorder  
continues to record, but a blank screen will be  
recorded.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Learning the common elements  
GUIDE Plus+ (For satellite, cable,  
terrestrial users only)  
Press GUIDE  
.
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home Screen”  
appears.  
Introduction to the  
GUIDE Plus+ System  
®
The GUIDE Plus+ system is a free  
interactive programme guide. It displays up  
to seven days of programme listings,  
including programme titles, promotions, and  
broadcast information. GUIDE Plus+ data for  
the television programme listings are carried  
by your local broadcast host channel and are  
received through your aerial, set top box  
receiver, or direct cable connection from the  
wall.  
Visit www.europe.guideplus.com for a list of  
all European host channels.  
A Video Window: This shows the  
programme you were watching when  
you pressed GUIDE  
.
These are just a few of the ways to use the  
GUIDE Plus+ system.  
– Search for a programme by listing them  
according to category (such as Movies or  
Sports) or by using the Keyword Search  
function (page 74).  
– Once you have found the programme you  
are looking for, use the GUIDE Plus+  
system to set the timer for recording  
– You can set the system to display your  
favourite programmes according to  
conditions that you set, such as category  
and keyword (page 74).  
B Action Bar: When the same colour  
button on the remote is pressed, the  
Action Bar functions. The Action Bar  
function differs according to the  
screen.  
C Information Box: Shows information  
about the selected programme when  
the “Home Screen” is displayed.  
Contents will differ according to the  
displayed screen.  
D Menu Bar: Press the blue button  
(“Home”), and press M to move the  
cursor to the Menu Bar. Then, select  
one of the following features using </  
,, and press ENTER.  
For more information, see “Watching TV  
“Grid”: Shows the programmes for the  
current time slot and next 7 days.  
“Search”: Allows you to search for  
titles by category or by keyword  
(page 73). The displayed category  
depends upon the programme data  
received by this recorder. Movies,  
Sports, and Children are examples of  
possible categories.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
• Check the following if the programme  
guide data has not been received after  
waiting for a day:  
– “Easy Setup” (page 27) is finished.  
– The host channel is not disabled (see  
page 78).  
“My TV”: Sets the profile for your  
favourite programmes (page 74).  
“Schedule”: Displays the list of timer  
“Info”: Shows information when  
available.  
“Editor”: Allows you to edit the  
channel lineup and channel display  
“Setup”: Allows you to change the  
language, country/region, postal code,  
input source, or host channel.  
– The timer is not set.  
If the programme guide data still cannot be  
received after checking the above, search  
for the host channel at the following  
website and set the host channel manually  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
E “Home” position: When you press the  
blue button (“Home”), the cursor  
returns to the last programme position  
on the “Grid.”  
• If the host channel has changed or moved,  
the programme guide data cannot be  
received. In this case, follow the steps in  
channel” (page 76) to update the host  
channel setting.  
F Tiles: Shows the programme titles and  
category; green (sports), purple  
(movies), blue (children’s), teal  
(others).  
b Notes  
• Your set top box receiver’s programme position  
may suddenly change even if the recorder is  
turned off. This is because the set top box  
controller has changed the programme position to  
receive the GUIDE Plus+ data.  
G Broadcast station Logo: Shows the  
broadcast station logo.  
H Time Slot: Indicates the currently  
selected time slot. Use </, to select  
a different time slot.  
• When you set “Factory Setup” to “All,” the  
recorder is initialized. When you change the  
following settings, the GUIDE Plus+ system is  
reset:  
– Postal code setting in “Easy Setup”  
– “Postal Code” of “Setup” - “Basic Setup” in the  
Menu Bar  
Troubleshooting guide  
Note that the GUIDE Plus+ system is also reset  
when you make changes to the host channel  
settings or if you set “Factory Setup” to “Basic.”  
If you are having trouble displaying the  
television programme list, please check the  
following:  
• Your postal code must be set correctly  
• The clock must be set correctly. If the clock  
is not set, set it manually (page 134).  
• This recorder downloads the GUIDE Plus+  
data several times a day when the recorder  
is turned off (standby mode). Turn off the  
recorder when you are not using it (for  
example, at night). After initial setup  
(page 27), it may take up to 24 hours for  
your recorder to start receiving programme  
listings. It may take up to one day to receive  
all seven days of TV programme listings.  
,continued  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
To select a programme position quickly  
using the TV broadcast station logo  
Watching TV Using the  
GUIDE Plus+ System  
1
Press GUIDE  
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home  
Screen” appears.  
.
2
Press the yellow button (“Channels”).  
Colour  
buttons  
GUIDE  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
3
4
Select the TV broadcast station logo  
using </M/m/,, then press ENTER.  
The display returns to “Grid” and the  
programme currently being broadcast by  
the selected TV station is selected.  
DAY –  
PAGE  
/
DAY +  
1 Press GUIDE  
.
Select a programme using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home  
Screen” appears.  
To unlock the Video Window  
The Video Window is locked so that it does  
not change programme positions when you  
move the cursor across other titles.  
From “Grid,” select the logo of the  
programme position that is locked, and press  
the red button (“Unlock”). “ ” changes to  
” and the Video Window is unlocked. To  
lock the Video Window, select the logo of the  
programme position you want to lock and  
press the red button (“Lock”).  
2 Select a programme using </M/m/  
,, and press ENTER.  
To return to the “Home” position  
Press the blue button (“Home”).  
The cursor returns to the home position on the  
“Grid.”  
The GUIDE Plus+ system disappears and  
the programme position changes to the  
selected programme.  
To set a programme for timer recording  
To close the GUIDE Plus+ system  
Press GUIDE  
.
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
z Hints  
• Press the PAGE  
programme list by page.  
• Press the DAY +/– buttons to change the  
programme list by day.  
/
buttons to change the  
Searching for a  
Programme Using the  
GUIDE Plus+ System  
b Notes  
• The Video Window is locked during recording  
and the lock indicator appears in the Video  
Window. You cannot unlock the Video Window  
while recording.  
• If you are watching programmes through a set top  
box, the Video Window may not change as fast as  
you move the cursor. In this case, lock the Video  
• The screen saver will appear if no buttons are  
pressed for more than ten minutes.  
Colour  
buttons  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
1 Select “Search” in the Menu Bar, and  
press ENTER.  
2 Select a category using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
To search for a programme by keyword,  
select “My Choice.” You can search for all  
programmesthatcontainthekeywordinthe  
programme’s title and in the programme’s  
Information Box. If no keywords are  
displayed,enterthekeyword.SeeToenter  
a new keyword” below.  
3 Select a sub-category using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
Programmes that meet the conditions are  
listed up.  
The sub-categories differ according to  
country/region.  
,continued  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 Select a programme using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
ListingUpYourFavourite  
Programme Information  
(My TV)  
To enter a new keyword  
1
Select “Search” in the Menu Bar, and  
press ENTER.  
You can set a profile and list up only your  
favourite programme information.  
2
3
Select “My Choice” using </,.  
Press the yellow button (“Add”).  
The display for entering characters  
appears.  
Colour  
buttons  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
4
Select a character on the keyboard using  
</M/m/,, and press ENTER.  
To switch between upper-case, lower-  
case, or characters with accents, press the  
yellow button (“Keyboard”) repeatedly.  
To cancel entering a new keyword, press  
the red button (“Back”).  
Setting a profile  
1 Select “My TV” in the Menu Bar.  
2 Press the yellow button (“Profile”).  
5
6
Repeat step 4 to enter the keyword.  
Press the green button (“Save”).  
The entered keyword is registered.  
To delete the keyword, select the  
keyword you want to delete, and press  
the red button (“Delete”).  
To change the keyword, select the  
keyword you want to change, and press  
the green button (“Edit”).  
To set a programme for timer recording  
z Hint  
When two or more keywords are set for “My  
Choice,” you can select “All.”  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Select “Channels,” “Categories,” or  
“Keywords,” and press the yellow  
button (“Add”).  
Making Changes to the  
GUIDE Plus+ System  
“Channels”: Select the programme  
position using </M/m/,, and press  
ENTER. To add more programme  
positions, press the yellow button  
(“Add”). You can register up to 16  
programme positions.  
[/1  
To cancel the registration, select a  
programme position, and press the red  
button (“Delete”).  
Number  
buttons  
“Categories”: Select the category using  
</M/m/,, and press ENTER. To add  
more categories, press the yellow button  
(“Add”). You can register up to 4  
categories.  
To cancel the registration, select a  
category, and press the red button  
(“Delete”).  
Colour  
buttons  
GUIDE  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
“Keywords”: Enter a keyword. See “To  
enter a new keyword” on page 74. To add  
more keywords, press the yellow button  
(“Add”). You can register up to 16  
keywords.  
To cancel the registration, select a  
keyword, and press the red button  
(“Delete”).  
Changing the basic GUIDE  
Plus+ settings  
All necessary settings are made when you  
complete Easy Setup (page 27). Follow the  
steps below only if you want to make changes  
to the current settings. Note that if you  
change the country/region setting, Easy  
Setup will begin again when you close the  
GUIDE Plus+ system.  
4 Press ENTER.  
To change the profile settings  
1
2
3
Select “My TV” in the Menu Bar.  
Press the yellow button (“Profile”).  
Repeat from step 3 above.  
1 Press GUIDE  
.
The GUIDE Plus+ system appears.  
Selecting and watching a  
programme from My TV  
2 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar.  
The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.  
1 Select “My TV” in the Menu Bar, and  
press ENTER.  
The programmes that match the profile  
conditions are displayed.  
2 Select a programme using </M/m/  
,, and press ENTER.  
To set a programme for timer recording  
,continued  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 Select “Basic Setup” using M/m, and  
Searching for the GUIDE Plus+  
host channel  
press ENTER.  
The default host channel setting is set to  
“Automatic,” so you should not have to  
change the host channel setting. However, if  
the host channel has changed or moved,  
update the host channel setting.  
1 Press GUIDE  
.
The GUIDE Plus+ system appears.  
2 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar.  
4 Select an item using M/m, and press  
The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.  
ENTER.  
3 Select “Host Channel Setup” using M/  
5 Select a setting using M/m, and press  
m, and press ENTER.  
ENTER.  
4 Press the yellow button (“Reset”).  
“Language”: Select a language for the  
on-screen displays using M/m.  
“Country”: Select “United Kingdom”  
using M/m.  
When you exit the GUIDE Plus+ system  
after changing your country/region, the  
“Easy Setup” display appears. Follow the  
(page 27) from step 2.  
5 Press [/1 to turn off the recorder.  
6 Wait for a day until the programme  
guide data can be received.  
If the programme guide data has not been  
received after waiting for a day, search  
for the host channel at the following  
website and set the host channel  
“Postal Code”: Enter your postal code  
using </M/m/,. If “Country” is set to  
“Other,” you cannot enter a postal code  
and the GUIDE Plus+ system will not  
search for a host channel.  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
“External Receiver 1”/“External  
Receiver 2”/“External Receiver 3”:  
When a set top box receiver is connected  
to the recorder, set it up for the GUIDE  
®
top box receiver for the GUIDE Plus+  
system (Analogue Mode only)” on  
6 Press GUIDE  
Plus+ system.  
to exit the GUIDE  
To cancel GUIDE Plus+ settings  
Press the red button (“Back”).  
To return to the “Home” position  
Press the blue button (“Home”).  
The cursor returns to the home position on the  
“Grid.”  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To cancel the settings  
Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host  
channel manually  
Press the red button (“Back”).  
To return to the “Home” position  
Press the blue button (“Home”).  
The cursor returns to the home position on the  
“Grid.”  
If you are using connection B (page 17) and  
you want to receive the programme guide  
data from your set top box receiver, search  
for the host channel on the following website  
and set it for your area, following the steps  
below:  
To check the GUIDE Plus+ system  
information  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
1
2
Press GUIDE  
.
Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar, and  
press ENTER.  
1 Press GUIDE  
.
The GUIDE Plus+ system appears.  
3
Select “GUIDE Plus+ system  
Information” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
2 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar.  
The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.  
3 Select “Host Channel Setup” using M/  
m, and press ENTER.  
Checking programme positions  
4 Press the yellow button (“Change”)  
twice.  
Check whether programme position numbers  
are the same as the programme position  
numbers set in the “Programme Setting.”  
If you want to make adjustments to the  
channel settings or change the channel name,  
see “Programme Setting” in “Settings and  
“Manual” appears.  
1 Select “Editor” in the Menu Bar.  
5 Select “Source” using ,.  
6 Press the yellow button (“Source”)  
repeatedly to select the input source.  
7 Select “Prog. No.” using ,.  
8 Enter the programme position number  
using the number buttons.  
2 Press ENTER.  
9 Press the green button (“Save”).  
3 Press , to move the cursor to the  
The display asks for confirmation.  
right column.  
10 Select “Confirm” using </,, and  
4 Select the programme position you  
press ENTER.  
want to check using M/m.  
The display returns to the GUIDE Plus+  
setup menu.  
To change the input source, press the red  
button (“Source”).  
To change the programme position, see  
11 Wait one day until the programme  
guide data can be received.  
,continued  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
b Note  
To receive from the recorder a programme position  
that can be received by either the set top box  
receiver or the recorder, change the input source in  
step 4.  
Disabling programme positions  
If any programme positions are unused or  
contain unwanted channels, you can hide  
them.  
1 Select “Editor” in the Menu Bar, and  
press ENTER.  
2 In the left column, select the  
programme position you want to hide  
or display using M/m.  
3 Press the red button (“On/Off”).  
The disabled positions will turn grey.  
To show the disabled positions, press the  
red button (“On/Off”) again.  
b Notes  
• You cannot record a programme position, if it is  
not set in “Programme Setting” of “Settings and  
Adjustments,” even if it is set to “On” in the  
“Editor” in the Menu Bar.  
• If you are using your set top box receiver to  
receive programmes (connection B, page 17) and  
are able to receive the same programme with both  
the set top box and the recorder, change the  
“Source” to receive the programme with the  
recorder’s tuner.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the  
recording modes.  
Timer Recording (For satellite,  
cable, terrestrial users only)  
To select the HQ+ mode, set “HQ Setting” of  
the “HDD Rec. Settings” to “HQ+” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 146). “HQ+”  
records pictures in higher quality than HQ on  
the HDD. Note that HQ+ appears as HQ in  
the front panel display and the on-screen  
displays.  
Before Recording  
Before you start recording…  
• Check that the disc has enough available  
space for the recording (page 41). For the  
HDD, DVD+RWs, and DVD-RWs, you  
can free up disc space by erasing titles  
Approx. recording  
time (hours)  
Recording mode  
HDD  
DVD*  
HQ+ (High quality) 32  
1
• Adjust the recording picture quality and  
picture size if necessary (page 85).  
HQ  
R
R
50  
72  
HSP  
1 hr.  
30 min.  
z Hint  
Timer recordings will be made regardless whether  
or not the recorder is turned on. You can turn off the  
recorder without affecting the recording even after  
recording starts.  
SP (Standard mode) 96  
2
LSP  
r
120  
2 hr.  
30 min.  
b Note  
ESP  
LP  
r
r
r
144  
193  
291  
3
4
6
8
To play a recorded disc on other DVD equipment,  
finalise the disc (page 44).  
EP  
SLP (Long duration) 387  
Recording mode  
* The recording time for DVD+R DL (Double  
Layer) discs is as follows:  
HQ: 1 hour 48 minutes  
HSP: 2 hours 42 minutes  
SP: 3 hours 37 minutes  
Like the standard ×3 recording modes of  
video tapes, you can select the desired  
recording mode using the REC MODE  
button.  
LSP: 4 hours 31 minutes  
ESP: 5 hours 25 minutes  
LP: 7 hours 14 minutes  
EP: 10 hours 51 minutes  
SLP: 14 hours 28 minutes  
Recording modes with higher quality provide  
a more beautiful recording, but the large data  
volume also results in a shorter recording  
time.  
Conversely, a longer duration provides a  
longer recording time, but the lower data  
volume results in a coarser picture quality.  
b Notes  
• The maximum continuous recording time for a  
single title is eight hours.  
• Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies  
with the recording time.  
– Recording a programme with poor reception, or  
a programme or video source of low picture  
quality  
– Recording on a disc that has already been edited  
– Recording only a still picture or just sound  
,continued  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Recording stereo and bilingual  
programmes  
Unrecordable pictures  
Pictures with copy protection cannot be  
recorded on this recorder.  
When the recorder receives a copy guard  
signal, the recorder continues to record but  
only a blank, grey coloured screen will be  
recorded.  
The recorder automatically receives and  
records stereo and bilingual programmes  
based on the ZWEITON system or the  
NICAM system.  
The HDD and a DVD-RW (VR mode) or  
DVD-R (VR mode) can record both main and  
sub sounds. You can switch between main  
and sub when playing the disc. For the HDD,  
you can select the sound track before  
recording. Select “Main,” “Sub,” or  
“Main+Sub” in “Bilingual Recording” of the  
“HDD Rec. Settings” in the “Recording”  
setup (page 145).  
A DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Video mode),  
DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video mode) can  
record only one sound track (main or sub) at  
a time. Select the sound track using the Setup  
Display before recording starts. Set  
“Bilingual Recording” of the “DVD Rec.  
Settings” to “Main” (default) or “Sub” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 146).  
Copy control Recordable discs  
signals  
Copy-Free  
+
RW  
-
RWVR  
HDD  
-
+
-
RVR  
RWVideo  
R
-
RVideo  
Copy-Once  
Copy-Never  
HDD  
-
RWVR  
(CPRM*)  
(CPRM*)  
-
RVR  
None (a blank screen is  
recorded)  
* The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM  
compatible equipment (page 10).  
ZWEITON (German stereo) system  
When a stereo based programme is received,  
“Stereo” appears.  
When a bilingual ZWEITON based  
programme is received, “Main,” “Sub,” or  
“Main/Sub” appears.  
NICAM system  
When a stereo or bilingual NICAM based  
programme is received, “NICAM” appears in  
the front panel display.  
To record a NICAM programme, be sure to  
set “Audio” of “Programme Setting” in the  
“Basic” setup to “NICAM” (default). If the  
sound is not clear when listening to NICAM  
broadcasts, set “Audio” to “Standard” (see  
z Hint  
You can select the audio (main or sub) while  
recording bilingual programmes using the AUDIO  
button. This does not affect the recorded sound.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
1 Press GUIDE  
.
Timer Recording (GUIDE  
Plus+/VIDEO Plus+/  
Manual)  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
There are three methods to set the timer  
within the GUIDE Plus+ system: One Button  
Recording, VIDEO Plus+, and setting the  
timer manually.  
2 Select a programme using </M/m/  
,.  
b Notes  
To search for a programme by category  
or by keyword, select “Search” in the  
information about searching for a  
programme.  
• When the recorder is connected to a set top box  
receiver and you want to record using the GUIDE  
Plus+ system, turn on the set top box receiver and  
connect the set top box controller.  
• Do not operate your set top box receiver just  
before or during a timer recording. This may  
prevent the accurate recording of a programme.  
You can select a programme from “My  
TV.”  
One Button Recording (GUIDE  
Plus+)  
3 Press the red button (“Record”).  
The set programme and Time Slot  
change colour and the recorder is ready  
to start recording. When recording from a  
set top box receiver, be sure to turn it on.  
Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn off  
the recorder before the timer recording  
starts.  
You can use the GUIDE Plus+ system to set  
the timer to record a programme up to seven  
days in advance.  
• To record on a DVD  
• To make more detailed timer settings  
Colour  
buttons  
GUIDE  
To confirm, change, or cancel a timer  
recording  
</M/m/,  
To stop recording during timer recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording, and that the  
recording cannot be stopped within the first  
minute of recording.  
[TIMER]  
x REC  
STOP  
,continued  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
b Notes  
To adjust the recording quality  
• If a message indicating that the disc is full appears  
on the screen, change the disc, or make available  
space for the recording (HDD/DVD+RW/DVD-  
Rec. Mode Adjust  
• The last recording mode you selected manually  
becomes the default recording mode for timer  
recordings made from the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
• You cannot adjust the recording quality (HDD or  
DVD) once the recording starts.  
• The beginning of some recordings may not be  
made when using the PDC/VPS function.  
• You cannot extend the recording duration time  
when “PDC/VPS” is set to “On” (page 88).  
If there is not enough available disc space for  
the recording, the recorder automatically  
adjusts the recording mode to enable the  
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.  
Mode Adjust” of the “Timer Settings” to  
“On” in the “Recording” setup (page 146).  
Auto Title Erase (HDD only)  
If there is not enough space for a timer  
recording, the recorder automatically erases  
old titles recorded on the HDD.  
The oldest played title is erased. Set “Auto  
Title Erase” of the “Timer Settings” to “On”  
in the “Recording” setup (page 146).  
Protected titles are not erased.  
Recording TV programmes  
using the VIDEO Plus+ system  
The VIDEO Plus+ system is a feature that  
simplifies setting the timer. Just enter the  
PlusCode programming number listed in the  
TV programme guide. The date, time, and  
programme position of that programme are  
set automatically.  
Check that the programme positions are  
correctly set in “Programme Setting” in the  
“Basic” setup (page 131).  
One Touch Timer  
If you use the SMARTLINK connection, you  
can easily display the GUIDE Plus+ system  
“Schedule”.  
When the TV is turned on or in standby  
mode, press [TIMER]. The recorder  
automatically turns on and the TV’s input is  
switched to the recorder. The SCHEDULE  
list appears.  
Number  
buttons  
If the timer settings overlap  
If one or more timer settings overlap, a  
message appears. To change the timer  
Colour  
buttons  
z Hint  
</,,  
ENTER  
If you are recording to the HDD or a DVD-RW (VR  
mode) at a recording mode that is SP or lower and  
is a 2x-speed or higher disc, you can play the title as  
it is being recorded by selecting the programme title  
on the Title List (page 95).  
[TIMER]  
x REC  
STOP  
1 With the GUIDE Plus+ system turned  
off, press [TIMER].  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2 Press the red button (“VIDEO Plus+”).  
Auto Title Erase (HDD only)  
If there is not enough space for a timer  
recording, the recorder automatically erases  
old titles recorded on the HDD.  
The oldest played title is erased. Set “Auto  
Title Erase” of the “Timer Settings” to “On”  
in the “Recording” setup (page 146).  
Protected titles are not erased.  
One Touch Timer  
If you use the SMARTLINK connection, you  
can easily display the GUIDE Plus+ system  
“Schedule”.  
When the TV is turned on or in standby  
mode, press [TIMER]. The recorder  
automatically turns on and the TV’s input is  
switched to the recorder. The SCHEDULE  
list appears.  
3 Press the number buttons to enter the  
PlusCode programming number.  
• If you make a mistake, press < and re-  
enter the correct number.  
4 Press ENTER.  
The date, start and stop times,  
programme position, etc. setting appear.  
The recorder is ready to start recording.  
• To record on a DVD  
Setting the timer manually  
• To make more detailed timer settings  
Number  
buttons  
To confirm, change, or cancel a timer  
recording  
Colour  
buttons  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
To stop recording during timer recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
[TIMER]  
z REC  
Rec. Mode Adjust  
x REC  
If there is not enough available disc space for  
the recording, the recorder automatically  
adjusts the recording mode to enable the  
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.  
Mode Adjust” of the “Timer Settings” to  
“On” in the “Recording” setup (page 146).  
STOP  
1 With the GUIDE Plus+ system turned  
off, press [TIMER].  
,continued  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
2 Press the green button (“Manual”).  
To confirm, change, or cancel a timer  
recording  
To stop recording during timer recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
Rec. Mode Adjust  
If there is not enough available disc space for  
the recording, the recorder automatically  
adjusts the recording mode to enable the  
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.  
Mode Adjust” in the “Recording” setup to  
3 Set the date using the number buttons  
and </M/m/,. Then press the  
green button (“Next”).  
4 Set the start time using the number  
buttons and </M/m/,. Then press  
the green button (“Next”).  
Auto Title Erase (HDD only)  
If there is not enough space for a timer  
recording, the recorder automatically erases  
old titles recorded on the HDD.  
Set “Auto Title Erase” in the “Recording”  
setup to “On” (page 146). The oldest played  
title is erased. Protected titles are not erased.  
5 Set the stop time using the number  
buttons and </M/m/,. Then press  
the green button (“Next”).  
6 Select the input source using M/m,  
and select the programme position  
using the number buttons or M/m.  
You can also select the programme  
position using the yellow button  
(“Channels”).  
If the timer settings overlap  
If one or more timer settings overlap, a  
message appears. To change the timer  
7 Press the green button (“Next”).  
The display for entering characters  
appears.  
One Touch Timer  
If you use the SMARTLINK connection, you  
can easily display the GUIDE Plus+ system  
“Schedule”.  
When the TV is turned on or in standby  
mode, press [TIMER]. The recorder  
automatically turns on and the TV’s input is  
switched to the recorder. The SCHEDULE  
list appears.  
To change the title name, select a  
character on the keyboard using </M/  
m/,, and press ENTER.  
To switch between upper-case, lower-  
case, or characters with accents, press the  
yellow button (“Keyboard”).  
8 Press the green button (“Save”).  
The date, start and stop times,  
programme position, etc. setting appear.  
The recorder is ready to start recording.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using the Quick Timer function  
Adjusting the recording picture  
quality and size  
You can set the recorder to record in  
30 minute increments.  
You can adjust the recording picture quality  
and picture size.  
Press z REC repeatedly to set the  
duration.  
Each press advances the time in 30 minute  
increments. The maximum duration is six  
hours.  
(normal recording)  
The time counter decreases minute by minute  
to 0:00, then the recorder stops recording (the  
power does not turn off). Even if you turn off  
the recorder during recording, the recorder  
continues to record until the time counter  
runs out.  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
Note that the Quick Timer function does not  
work if “TV Direct Rec.” is set to “On” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 146).  
1 Before recording starts, press  
OPTIONS to select “Rec. Settings,”  
and press ENTER.  
To cancel the Quick Timer  
Press z REC repeatedly until the counter  
appears in the front panel display. The  
recorder returns to normal recording mode.  
2 Select the item you want to adjust,  
and press ENTER.  
The adjustment display appears.  
Example: Rec. NR  
“Rec. Mode”:  
Selects the recording mode for the  
desired recording time and picture  
quality. For more information, see  
,continued  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
b Notes  
“HDD Rec. Picture Size”/“DVD Rec.  
Picture Size”:  
Sets the picture size of the programme to  
be recorded.  
• 4 : 3 (default): Sets the picture size to  
4:3.  
• 16 : 9: Sets the picture size to 16:9  
(wide mode).  
• If one programme contains two picture sizes, the  
selected size is recorded. However, if the 16:9  
signal cannot be recorded as 16:9, it is recorded as  
4:3.  
• When playing a 16:9 size picture recorded as 4:3,  
the image is fixed to 4:3 Letter Box regardless of  
the setting in “TV Type” of “Video” setup  
• Auto (HDD only): Automatically  
selects the actual picture size.  
• Remnants of images may appear on your screen  
when using “Rec. NR.”  
• “Rec. Video Equalizer” does not affect the input  
of the DV IN jack and does not work with RGB  
signals.  
“DVD Rec. Picture Size” works with  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode)  
when the recording mode is set to HQ,  
HSP, SP, LSP, or ESP. For all other  
recording modes, the screen size is fixed  
at “4 : 3.”  
Creating chapters in a title  
The recorder can automatically divide a  
recording (a title) into chapters by inserting  
chapter marks at approximately 6 minute  
intervals during recording. To disable this  
function, set “Auto Chapter” in the  
“Recording” setup to “Off” (page 146).  
When recording to the HDD, a DVD-R (VR  
mode) or a DVD-RW (VR mode), you can  
insert and erase chapter marks manually  
For DVD-Rs/DVD-RWs (VR mode), the  
actual picture size is recorded regardless  
of the setting. For example, if a 16:9 size  
picture is received, the disc records the  
picture as 16:9 even if “DVD Rec.  
Picture Size” is set to “4 : 3.”  
For DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, the screen  
size is fixed at “4 : 3.”  
“Rec. NR” (noise reduction): Reduces  
noise contained in the video signal.  
b Note  
When dubbing (page 109), the chapter marks in the  
dubbing source are not retained in the dubbed title.  
“Rec. Video Equalizer”: Adjusts the  
picture in greater detail.  
Press M/m to select the item you want to  
adjust, then press ENTER.  
• Contrast: Changes the contrast.  
• Brightness: Changes the overall  
brightness.  
• Colour: Makes the colours deeper or  
lighter.  
3 Adjust the setting using </M/m/,,  
and press ENTER.  
The default setting is underlined.  
“Rec. NR”: (weak) Off 1 ~ 2 ~ 3  
(strong)  
“Rec. Video Equalizer”:  
• Contrast: (weak) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (strong)  
• Brightness: (dark) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (bright)  
• Colour: (light) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (deep)  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust any other  
items.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3 Press the green button (“Edit”).  
Checking/Changing/  
Cancelling Timer  
Settings  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVR  
RVideo  
You can change or cancel timer settings using  
the SCHEDULE list.  
4 In the left column, select an item  
using the red button (“Back”) or the  
green button (“Next”), and adjust  
using the number buttons or </M/m/  
,.  
Number  
buttons  
You can change the date, start time, stop  
time, programme position, or input  
source.  
Colour  
buttons  
GUIDE  
The cursor moves to the right column.  
5 Press the corresponding colour button  
repeatedly to change settings.  
• Red button (“Media”): Sets the  
recording destination to either HDD or  
DVD.  
</M/m/,  
OPTIONS  
[TIMER]  
• Green button (“Frequency”): Selects  
the recording pattern. The item changes  
as follows:  
Once t Daily t Mon-Fri (Monday  
to Friday) t Mon-Sat (Monday to  
Saturday) t Sun (every Sunday) t  
...... t Sat (every Saturday) t Once  
• Yellow button (“Rec Mode”): Selects  
the recording mode (page 79).  
Changing timer settings  
1 With the GUIDE Plus+ system turned  
off, press [TIMER].  
The SCHEDULE list appears.  
6 Press , to display “Extend Time.”  
7 Press the yellow button (“Extend  
Time”) repeatedly to select the  
duration time or to set the PDC/VPS  
function.  
The item changes as follows:  
+0 Minutes t +10 Minutes t  
+30 Minutes t +60 Minutes t VPS /  
PDC t +0 Minutes  
See “About the PDC/VPS function”  
below.  
2 Select the timer setting you want to  
change using M/m.  
,continued  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
z Hint  
When the timer settings overlap  
You can also extend the recording time while  
recording by pressing OPTIONS and selecting  
“Extend Rec..”  
The programme that starts first has priority  
and the second programme starts recording  
only after the first programme has finished.  
b Note  
The new settings become effective when you exit  
the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
will be cut off  
About the PDC/VPS function  
When the recordings start at the same  
time  
The programme that is set last has priority. In  
this example, timer setting B is set after A, so  
the first part of timer setting A will not be  
recorded.  
PDC/VPS signals are transmitted with TV  
programmes in some broadcast systems.  
These signals ensure that timer recordings are  
made regardless of any broadcast delays,  
early starts, or broadcast interruptions.  
To use the PDC/VPS function  
Select “VPS / PDC” in step 7 above.  
When you turn on this function, the recorder  
starts scanning the channels before the timer  
recording starts. If you are watching TV  
when scanning starts, a message will appear  
on the TV screen. If you want to watch TV,  
switch to your TV’s tuner or turn off the  
PDC/VPS channel scan function.  
When the end time of one recording and  
the start time of another are the same  
After finishing the previous recording, the  
other recording may be delayed.  
Note that if you turn off the PDC/VPS  
channel scan function, the timer recording  
will not start.  
To temporarily turn off PDC/VPS channel  
scan  
Press OPTIONS and select “PDC/VPS Scan  
Off.”  
b Note  
When “PDC/VPS” is set to “On” for one or more  
timer recordings, the start times may change in the  
event of a broadcast delay or early start.  
To ensure that the PDC/VPS function works  
properly, turn off the recorder before the  
timer recording starts. This will  
automatically turn on the PDC/VPS channel  
scan function while the recorder remains off.  
Cancelling timer settings  
1 With the GUIDE Plus+ system turned  
off, press [TIMER].  
The SCHEDULE list appears.  
2 Select the timer setting you want to  
cancel using M/m.  
3 Press the red button (“Delete”).  
To close the SCHEDULE list  
Press GUIDE  
or [TIMER].  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Recording from  
Connected Equipment  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
Recording from connected  
equipment with a timer  
(Synchro Rec)  
You can set the recorder to automatically  
record programmes from connected  
equipment that has a timer function (such as  
a satellite tuner). Connect the equipment to  
the LINE 3/DECODER jack of the recorder  
When the connected equipment turns on, the  
recorder starts recording a programme from  
the LINE 3/DECODER jack.  
For details on operation, see page 67.  
For details on bilingual recording, see  
b Notes  
• The Synchro Rec function does not work when  
“Line3 Input” of “Scart Setting” is set to  
“Decoder” in the “Video” setup (page 142).  
• While the recorder is standing by for Synchro-  
Recording, the Auto Clock Set function  
(page 134) does not work.  
• To use the Synchro Rec function, you must first  
set the recorder’s clock correctly.  
Recording from connected  
equipment without a timer  
You can record from a connected VCR or  
similar device. To connect a VCR or similar  
Device” on page 30. Use the DV IN jack on  
the front panel if the equipment has a DV  
output jack (i.LINK jack).  
For details about operation, see page 68.  
For details about bilingual recording, see  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 Select the title, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
Playback  
Playing  
+
4 Select “Play,” and press ENTER.  
Playback starts from the selected title.  
To use the DVD’s Menu  
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RW  
RWVR RWVideo  
When you play a DVD VIDEO, or a finalised  
DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Video mode),  
DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video mode), you can  
display the disc’s menu by pressing TOP  
MENU or MENU.  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
DVD VCD  
CD  
DATA DVD DATA CD  
HDD  
Z (open/  
DVD  
close)  
To play VIDEO CDs with PBC functions  
PBC (Playback Control) allows you to play  
VIDEO CDs interactively using the menu on  
your TV screen.  
When you start playing a VIDEO CD with  
PBC functions, the menu appears.  
Select an item using the number buttons and  
press ENTER. Then, follow the instructions  
in the menu (press H when “Press  
SELECT” appears).  
Number  
buttons  
AUDIO  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
SUBTITLE  
TITLE LIST  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
/
.
The PBC function of Super VIDEO CDs does  
not work with this recorder. Super VIDEO  
CDs are played in continuous play mode  
only.  
>
x
H
X
To change the angles  
If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene  
are recorded on the disc, “  
” appears in  
the front panel display. Press OPTIONS  
during playback to select “Change Angle,”  
and press ENTER.  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
• If you select DVD, insert a disc (see “1.  
• If you insert a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO  
CD, DATA DVD*, or DATA CD*,  
press H. Playback starts.  
To stop playback  
Press x.  
* DivX video file only  
To playback quickly with sound (Scan  
Audio)  
When you press M during playback of a  
title recorded in the HDD, you can play  
quickly with dialogue or sound (“x1.3”  
appears).  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
For details about the Title List, see “3.  
Example: DVD+RW  
No sound is output when you press M two  
or more times to change search speed.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
1
Select “OK” and press ENTER.  
The display for entering your password  
appears.  
To fast forward or fast reverse a DivX  
video file  
Press m/M during playback.  
2
3
Enter your four-digit password using the  
number buttons.  
To go to the next or previous DivX video  
file  
Press . or > during playback. If you  
repeatedly press . or >, you will go to  
the next or previous album.  
Press ENTER to select “OK.”  
The recorder starts playback.  
To register or change the password, see  
To play DivX video file in slow motion/one  
frame at a time (Playback direction only)  
Press y/C in the pause mode.  
To lock the disc tray (Child Lock)  
You can lock the disc tray to prevent children  
from ejecting the disc.  
When the recorder is turned on, hold down x  
until “LOCKED” appears in the front panel  
display. The Z (open/close) button does not  
work while the Child Lock is set.  
To display the registration code for this  
recorder  
Select “Registration Code” in the “Others”  
To resume playback from the point where  
you stopped (Resume Play)  
To unlock the disc tray, hold down x until  
“UNLOCKED” appears in the front panel  
display when the recorder is turned on.  
When you press H again after you stop  
playback, the recorder resumes playback  
from the point where you pressed x.  
To start from the beginning, press OPTIONS  
to select “Play Beginning,” and press  
ENTER. Playback starts from the beginning  
of the title/track/scene.  
One Touch Play  
If you use the SMARTLINK connection, you  
can easily start playing.  
Press H. The recorder and your TV  
automatically turn on and the TV’s input is  
switched to the recorder. Playback starts  
automatically.  
The point where you stopped playing is  
cleared when:  
– you open the disc tray (except for HDD).  
– you play another title (except for HDD).  
– you switch the Title List menu to Original  
or Playlist (HDD/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in  
VR mode only).  
– you edit the title after stopping playback.  
– you change the settings on the recorder.  
– you turn off the recorder (VIDEO CD/CD/  
DATA DVD/DATA CD only).  
One Touch Menu  
If you use the SMARTLINK connection, you  
can easily display the Title List.  
Press TITLE LIST. The recorder and your  
TV automatically turn on and the TV’s input  
is switched to the recorder. The Title List  
appears.  
– you make a recording (except for HDD/  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode).  
– you disconnect the mains lead.  
z Hints  
• You can also use the H button in step 3  
(page 90) to start playback.  
• Even if you select “Factory Setup” in the  
“Others” setup (page 150), the Child Lock  
remains set.  
b Note  
You cannot resume playback during TV Pause.  
• For DivX video files, playback starts from the  
first DivX video file on the disc.  
• You can change the audio track when playing  
MP3 or MPEG audio of DivX video files using  
the AUDIO button.  
To play restricted DVDs (Parental Control)  
If you play a restricted DVD, the message  
“Do you want to temporarily change the  
Parental Control level to *?” appears on your  
TV screen.  
• You can display subtitles when playing DivX  
video files using the SUBTITLE button.  
,continued  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Playback options  
To check the position of the buttons below, see the illustration on page 90.  
Buttons  
Operations  
AUDIO  
Selects one of the audio tracks recorded on the disc when pressed  
repeatedly in normal playback mode.  
-
-
RWVR  
RVR  
HDD  
: Selects the language.  
DVD  
HDD  
DVD VCD CD  
-
: Selects the main or sub sound.  
-
RWVR  
RVR  
: Selects stereo or monaural audio tracks.  
VCD CD  
SUBTITLE  
Selects a subtitle language when pressed repeatedly.  
Replays the scene/briefly fast forwards the scene.  
DVD  
/
(instant replay/  
instant advance)  
-
+
RWVR  
RW  
HDD  
+
-
-
RVR  
RWVideo  
R
-
RVideo  
DVD  
. (previous)/> (next)  
Goes to the beginning of the previous/next title/chapter/scene/  
track.  
For the HDD, you cannot go to the beginning of the previous/  
next title.  
Fast reverses/fast forwards the disc when pressed during  
playback.  
(fast reverse/fast forward)  
Search speed changes as follows:  
fast reverse fast forward  
*1  
m1 T t 1M  
m2 T T t t 2M  
m3 T T T t t t 3M  
*2  
*2  
When you press and hold the button, fast forward/fast reverse  
continues at the selected speed until you release the button.  
*1  
When you press M once during playback of a title recorded in  
the HDD, you can play quickly with sound (“x1.3” appears).  
*2 m3 and 3M are only available for the HDD and DVDs.  
Plays in slow motion when pressed for more than one second in  
pause mode.  
(slow, freeze frame)  
Plays one frame at a time when pressed briefly in pause mode.  
-
+
RW  
RWVR  
HDD  
+
R
-
-
RVR  
RWVideo  
*
-
RVideo  
VCD  
DVD  
* Playback direction only  
X (pause)  
Pauses playback.  
To resume normal playback, press H.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
b Notes  
2 Select an item, and press ENTER.  
The adjustment display appears.  
“FNR” (frame noise reduction):  
Reduces noise contained in the  
luminance element of the video signal.  
“BNR” (block noise reduction):  
Reduces “block noise” or mosaic like  
patterns in the picture.  
• Angles and subtitles cannot be changed with titles  
recorded on this recorder.  
• Slideshows made with a DVD camcorder can  
only be played. Other play functions, such as fast  
forward, cannot be used.  
Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a  
CD  
“MNR” (mosquito noise reduction):  
Reduces the faint noise appearing around  
the outlines of the images. The noise  
reduction effects are automatically  
adjusted within each setting range  
according to the video bit rate and other  
factors.  
• When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive  
noise will be heard from the LINE 1-TV/LINE 3/  
DECODER/LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L) jacks.  
To avoid possible damage to the audio system,  
the consumer should take proper precautions  
when the LINE 1-TV/LINE 3/DECODER/LINE  
2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L) jacks of the recorder are  
connected to an amplification system. To enjoy  
DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an external  
DTS decoder must be connected to the DIGITAL  
OUT jack of the recorder.  
“Sharpness”:  
Sharpens the outlines of the images.  
“PB Video Equalizer” (Playback video  
equalizer):  
Adjusts the picture in greater detail.  
Select an item and press ENTER.  
• Contrast: changes the contrast.  
• Brightness: changes the overall  
brightness.  
• Set the sound to “Stereo” using the AUDIO  
button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD  
Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound  
track  
DTS audio signals are output only through the  
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) jack.  
When you play a DVD with DTS sound tracks, set  
“DTS” to “On” in the “Audio” setup (page 143).  
• Colour: makes the colours deeper or  
lighter.  
• Hue: changes the colour balance.  
3 Press </,to adjust the setting, and  
press ENTER.  
Adjusting the picture quality  
The default settings are underlined.  
“FNR”: (weak) Off  
“BNR”: (weak) Off  
“MNR”: (weak) Off  
1
1
2
2
2
3 (strong)  
3 (strong)  
3 (strong)  
+
RW  
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RWVR RWVideo  
*
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
1
DVD VCD  
DATA DVD  
*
“Sharpness”*: (weak) Off  
(strong)  
“PB Video Equalizer”:  
1
2
3
DATA CD  
* DivX video file only  
• Contrast: (weak) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (strong)  
• Brightness: (dark) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (bright)  
• Colour: (light) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (deep)  
• Hue: (red) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (green)  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust any other  
items.  
1 Press OPTIONS during playback to  
select “Video Settings,” and press  
ENTER.  
* “1” softens the outlines of the images. “2”  
enhances the outlines and “3” enhances them  
more than “2.”  
,continued  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
b Notes  
• If the outlines of the images on your screen  
become blurred, set “BNR” and/or “MNR” to  
“Off.”  
Pausing a TV Broadcast  
(TV Pause/Pause Live TV)  
• Depending on the disc or the scene being played,  
the above BNR, MNR, or FNR effects may be  
hard to discern. And, these functions may not  
work with some screen sizes.  
• When using the “Sharpness” function, noise  
found in the title may become more apparent. In  
this case, it is recommended that you use the BNR  
function with the “Sharpness” function. If the  
condition still does not improve, set the  
“Sharpness” level to “Off.”  
You can pause a current TV broadcast, and  
then continue watching the programme at a  
later time. This is useful when you receive an  
unexpected phone call or visitor while  
watching TV.  
1 While viewing a TV broadcast with  
this recorder, press X.  
The picture pauses. You can pause the  
picture for up to three hours.  
Adjusting the delay between  
the picture and sound (AV  
SYNC)  
+
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RW  
RWVR RWVideo  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
DVD VCD  
DATA DVD  
DATA CD  
1 Press OPTIONS during playback to  
select “Audio Settings,” and press  
ENTER.  
TV pause  
2 Press X or H again to resume  
2 Select “AV SYNC,” and press ENTER.  
watching the programme.  
“AV SYNC”:  
When the video is delayed, this function  
delays the audio for synchronization with  
the video (0 to 120 milliseconds). Larger  
numbers indicate a longer audio delay for  
synchronization with the video. When  
dubbing to a VCR or other video  
recording equipment, be sure to return  
this setting to 0 ms (default).  
b Notes  
• Paused titles are not saved to the HDD.  
• This function is cancelled when:  
x (stop) is pressed.  
– PROG +/– is pressed.  
– DVD is pressed.  
Z (open/close) is pressed.  
– TITLE LIST is pressed.  
– INPUT SELECT is pressed.  
– the recorder is turned off.  
3 Press</, to adjust the setting, and  
press ENTER.  
– a timer recording or Synchro-Recording is  
started.  
– the PDC/VPS function is “On” and channel  
scan is started.  
– DV dubbing or regular dubbing is started.  
• It may take one minute or more to resume  
playback of the paused programme.  
• Even if you fast forward the recorded programme,  
there will always be a time difference of about  
one minute or more between the recorded  
programme and the current TV broadcast.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
• While recording to a DVD:  
Playing from the beginning of  
the programme you are  
recording (Chasing Playback)  
Play a previously recorded programme on  
the HDD by pressing HDD.  
• While recording to a DVD-RW (VR  
*1  
mode)  
:
Play another title on the same DVD-RW  
-
RWVR  
HDD  
*2  
(VR mode) disc.  
*1  
Simultaneous Rec and Play function does not  
“Chasing Playback” allows you to view the  
recorded part of a programme while the  
recording is being made. You do not need to  
wait until the recording finishes.  
work when you record:  
– on a 1x-speed DVD-RW.  
– in the HQ or HSP recording mode.  
Picture noise may appear depending upon the  
condition of the recording, or when playing a  
title recorded in the HQ or HSP recording mode.  
The picture freezes for a few seconds when you  
use fast forward/fast reverse or instant replay/  
advance.  
*2  
Press OPTIONS while recording to select  
“Chasing Playback,” and press ENTER.  
Playback starts from the beginning of the  
programme you are recording.  
When you fast forward to the point that you  
are recording, Chasing Playback returns to  
normal playback.  
You can also play a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO  
CD, Super VIDEO CD, CD, DATA DVD, or  
DATA CD while recording on the HDD.  
Example: Play another title on the HDD  
while recording to the HDD.  
b Notes  
• For DVD-RWs (VR mode), this function does not  
work when recording:  
1
2
3
While recording, press TITLE LIST to  
display the HDD Title List.  
– on a 1x-speed DVD-RW.  
– in the HQ or HSP recording mode.  
• The DVD’s picture on your TV screen freezes for  
a few seconds when you fast forward/fast reverse  
or instant replay/advance the recording.  
• Chasing Playback is possible from one minute or  
more after recording starts.  
Select the title you want to play, and  
press ENTER.  
Select “Play” from the sub-menu, and  
press ENTER.  
• Even if you fast forward the recorded programme,  
there will always be a time difference of about  
one minute or more between the recorded  
programme and the current TV broadcast.  
Playback starts from the selected title.  
Example: Play a DVD while recording to  
the HDD.  
1
2
3
4
While recording, press DVD and insert  
the DVD into the recorder.  
Playing a previous recording  
while making another  
(Simultaneous Rec and Play)  
Press TITLE LIST to display the DVD  
Title List.  
Select the title you want to play, and  
press ENTER.  
+
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RW  
RWVR RWVideo  
-
-
RVR  
RVideo  
DVD VCD  
CD  
Select “Play” from the sub-menu, and  
press ENTER.  
DATA DVD DATA CD  
Playback starts from the selected title.  
“Simultaneous Rec and Play” allows you to  
view a previously recorded programme while  
recording programmes. Playback continues  
even if a timer recording starts. Use this  
function as follows:  
b Note  
You cannot play a DVD, DivX video or VIDEO  
CD recorded in the NTSC colour system while  
recording on the HDD. When playing a DivX video  
or VIDEO CD, be sure to set “Colour System” to  
“PAL” in the “Video” setup (page 142).  
• While recording to the HDD:  
Play another title on the HDD.  
Play a previously recorded programme on a  
DVD by pressing DVD.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The display for entering the number  
appears.  
Example: Title Search  
Searching for a Title/  
Chapter/Track, etc.  
+
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RW  
RWVR RWVideo  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
DVD VCD  
CD  
The number in parentheses indicates the  
total number of titles, tracks, etc.  
DATA DVD DATA CD  
You can search a disc by title, chapter, scene  
or track. As titles and tracks are assigned  
individual numbers, select the title or track by  
entering its number. You can also search for  
a scene using the time code.  
2 Press the number buttons to select the  
number of the title, chapter, track,  
time code, etc., you want.  
For example: Time Search  
To find a scene at 2 hours, 10 minutes,  
and 20 seconds, enter “21020.”  
If you make a mistake, select another  
number.  
Number  
buttons  
3 Press ENTER.  
The recorder starts playback from the  
selected number.  
b Note  
“Title Search” is not applicable to the HDD.  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
1 Press OPTIONS during playback to  
select a search method, and press  
ENTER.  
“Title Search” (for DVDs)  
“Chapter Search” (for HDD/DVDs)  
“Track Search” (for CDs)  
“Search” (for VIDEO CDs)  
“Album Search” (for DATA DVDs*/  
DATA CDs*)  
“Time Search” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA  
DVDs*/DATA CDs*): Searches for a  
starting point by entering the time code.  
“File Search” (for DATA DVDs*/DATA  
CDs*)  
* DivX video file only  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
5 Select “Copy Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
Copying MP3 Audio  
Tracks  
The confirmation screen appears.  
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The remaining copy time appears on the  
front panel display.  
HDD DATA DVD DATA CD  
To cancel copying, select “Cancel,” and  
press ENTER.  
You can copy MP3 audio tracks on a disc  
(DATA DVD/DATA CD) to the HDD.  
After copying the MP3 audio tracks to the  
HDD, the Music Jukebox function allows  
you to play MP3 audio tracks on the HDD by  
selecting a track from the “Music” Title List  
without exchanging discs.  
To copy multiple albums  
1
Insert the disc that you are going to copy  
to the HDD.  
2
3
Press DVD.  
Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch to the “Music”  
Title List, if necessary.  
Copying an MP3 audio album  
on a disc to the HDD  
4
5
Press OPTIONS to select “Copy  
Albums,” and press ENTER.  
DVD  
Select the albums you want to copy, and  
press ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
next to the selected album.  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• To clear all of check marks, select  
“Reset.”  
TITLE LIST  
6
7
Repeat step 5 to select all of the albums  
you want to copy.  
You can select up to 5 albums to copy.  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
When you finish selecting albums, select  
“OK,” and press ENTER.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
• To change the selection, select  
“Change,” and repeat from step 5.  
1 Insert the disc that you are going to  
copy to the HDD.  
8
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The remaining copy time appears in the  
front panel display.  
2 Press DVD.  
3 Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch to the “Music”  
Title List, if necessary.  
z Hint  
You can also start the operation by selecting  
“COPY MUSIC” from the System Menu.  
4 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
,continued  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
b Notes  
• You cannot copy MP3 audio tracks on the HDD  
to discs or USB devices.  
Managing MP3 Audio  
Tracks  
• The recorder copies only MP3 audio tracks stored  
directly under the album you select. If there is a  
sub-album under the selected album, the MP3  
audio tracks under the sub-album are not copied.  
• If you want to copy the files directly stored under  
a root folder, select “ROOT” from the music  
album list.  
• You cannot play or record while copying MP3  
audio tracks. “ ” appears on the “Music” Title  
List during copying.  
HDD  
b Note  
You cannot erase MP3 audio tracks or edit album  
titles on a disc.  
• Some MP3 audio tracks may not be copied  
depending on the file size.  
Erasing albums on the HDD  
• You cannot copy MP3 audio tracks if the HDD is  
full or almost full.  
• If the title of the album being copied is the same  
as an album already copied onto the HDD, an  
incremental number is automatically added after  
the title.  
1 Press HDD.  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch to the “Music”  
Title List, if necessary.  
• If an MP3 audio track you want to copy has ID3  
tag information (album, track, or artist), the  
information is also copied. However, there may  
be some information that cannot be copied.  
• For details about file/album number limitations  
3 Select the album title, and press  
ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
4 Select “Erase Album” and press  
ENTER.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
5 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
To stop copying  
The album is erased.  
Press OPTIONS to select “Stop Copying,”  
and press ENTER. When asked for  
confirmation, select “OK,” and press  
ENTER.  
To cancel, select “Cancel,” and press  
ENTER.  
When copying is stopped partway, no MP3  
audio track in the selected album is copied to  
the HDD. However, if an album (from a  
multiple set of albums that are to be copied)  
has finished copying before you stop, that  
album will remain copied onto the HDD. See  
the “Music” Title List of the HDD to check  
which albums have been copied.  
To erase multiple albums on the HDD  
1
2
Press HDD.  
Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch to the “Music”  
Title List, if necessary.  
3
4
Press OPTIONS to select “Erase  
Albums,” and press ENTER.  
Select the albums you want to erase, and  
press ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
next to the selected album.  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• To clear all of check marks, select  
“Reset.”  
5
Repeat step 4 to select all of the albums  
you want to erase.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6
7
When you finish selecting albums, select  
“OK,” and press ENTER.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
• To change the selection, select  
“Change,” and repeat from step 4.  
Playing MP3 Audio  
Tracks  
HDD DATA DVD DATA CD  
Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The albums are erased.  
You can play MP3 audio tracks on HDD/  
DATA DVDs/DATA CDs.  
Editing an album title on the  
HDD  
HDD  
DVD  
You can edit the album title on the HDD.  
AUDIO  
1 Press HDD.  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch to the “Music”  
Title List, if necessary.  
TITLE LIST  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
3 Select the album title, and press  
ALBUM  
/
.
ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
>
4 Select “Album Name,” and press  
m
M
x
ENTER.  
The display for entering characters  
appears.  
5 Select a character on the keyboard  
using </M/m/,, and press ENTER.  
6 Select “Finish,” and press ENTER.  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
If you select DVD, insert a disc (see “1.  
b Notes  
To play MP3 audio tracks on the HDD,  
MP3 audio tracks on DATA CDs/DATA  
DVDs must be copied to the HDD first  
• If you enter a character that is not allowed, a  
warning message appears. Select another  
character.  
• An album title can be set up to 32 characters.  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch to the “Music”  
Title List, if necessary.  
For details about the Title List, see “3.  
,continued  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
z Hint  
3 Select an album, and press ENTER.  
You can switch between stereo or monaural audio  
tracks by pressing AUDIO button when playing  
MP3 audio tracks.  
The sub-menu appears.  
4 Select “View Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
b Notes  
The track list appears.  
• If the disc contains MP3 audio tracks, JPEG  
image files, and DivX video files, only the DivX  
video files are played back when H is pressed.  
• If the disc contains MP3 audio tracks and DVD  
Videos, only DVD Videos will be played back  
when H is pressed.  
To change the page, press  
/
.
5 Select a track, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
6 Select “Play,” and press ENTER.  
You can also set to repeat mode. To set to  
repeat mode, see page 100.  
To stop playback  
Press x.  
To fast forward or fast reverse an MP3  
audio track  
Press m/M during playback.  
To go to the next or previous MP3 audio  
track  
Press . or > during playback. If you  
repeatedly press . or >, you will go to  
the next or previous album.  
To go to the next or previous album  
Press ALBUM  
/
during playback.  
To select the repeat mode  
1
2
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Playing MP3  
OPTIONS to select “Repeat Mode  
(Music).”  
Select repeat mode from the followings,  
and press ENTER.  
“All Repeat”:  
Repeats all tracks.  
“Album Repeat”:  
Repeats the album.  
For details about playable MP3 audio  
tracks, see page 162.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Erasing and Editing  
Before Editing  
This recorder offers various edit options for  
various disc types.  
b Notes  
• You may lose the edited contents if you remove  
the disc or a timer recording starts while editing.  
• DVD discs created by DVD video cameras  
cannot be edited on this recorder.  
• If a message appears and indicates that the disc’s  
control information is full, erase or edit  
unnecessary titles.  
• The recorder uses some space on the HDD/discs  
for system use, so the file size displayed on the  
screen cannot be fully used.  
• When editing a DVD+R or DVD-R, finish all  
editing before finalising the disc. You cannot edit  
a finalised disc.  
-
RWVR  
HDD  
+
RW  
-
RVR  
-
RWVideo  
Edit features  
+
R
Original  
title  
Playlist  
title  
Original  
title  
Playlist  
title  
-
RVideo  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes*  
Yes  
No  
Title Name (page 102)  
Erase Titles (page 103)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Set Thumbnail (page 102) Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Chapter mark (page 105)  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Change Order (page 107)  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
* DVD+RW only  
,continued  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
To open up disc space  
To open up disc space on a DVD+RW or  
DVD-RW (Video mode), erase the title with  
the largest number in the title list.  
Erasing and Editing a  
Title  
Largest title number  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
This section explains the basic edit functions.  
Note that editing is irreversible. To edit the  
HDD or DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)  
without changing the original recordings,  
create a Playlist title (page 105).  
For the HDD and DVD-RWs (VR mode),  
you can erase any title.  
For DVD-Rs and DVD+Rs, the available disc  
space does not increase even if you erase  
titles.  
CHAPTER  
MARK  
CHAPTER  
ERASE  
MARK  
TITLE LIST  
To switch between the Playlist and  
Original Title List  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
O
RETURN  
OPTIONS  
You can display the Playlist titles in the Title  
List (Playlist), or the Original titles in the  
Title List (Original). To switch the two Title  
Lists, press </, while a Title List is  
displayed. To create and edit a Playlist, see  
>
.
mc  
CM  
X
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
For HDD titles or DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs  
in the VR mode, press </, to switch  
the Title Lists, if necessary.  
2 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
3 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
You can make the following edits to the  
title.  
“Erase”: Erases the selected title. Select  
“OK” when asked for confirmation.  
“Protect”: Protects the title. “ ” appears  
next to the protected title.  
“Title Name”: Allows you to enter or re-  
enter a title name (page 42).  
“A-B Erase”: Erases a section of the title  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
“Divide”: Divides a title into two titles  
“Set Thumbnail”: Changes the title’s  
thumbnail picture that appears in the  
Title List (page 38).  
4 Repeat step 3 to select all of the titles  
you want to erase.  
5 When you finish selecting titles,  
select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The list of the titles to be erased appears  
for confirmation.  
“Make a Playlist”: Adds the entire title to  
the Playlist title as one scene (page 107).  
• To change the selection, select  
“Change,” and repeat from step 3.  
z Hints  
6 Select “OK” and press ENTER.  
• You can erase multiple titles at one time  
The titles are erased.  
• You can automatically erase titles that have  
already played (page 146).  
• You can label or re-label DVDs (page 43).  
To erase all titles on the disc  
You can reformat the HDD, DVD+RW, or  
DVD-RW to make the disc or drive blank.  
b Note  
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) playlist titles cannot  
be protected.  
To format a DVD+RW or DVD-RW disc, see  
Erasing multiple titles (Erase  
Titles)  
Erasing a section of a title  
(A-B Erase)  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
+
-
RWVR  
-
RVR  
HDD  
RW  
You can select and erase more than one title  
at one time using the OPTIONS menu.  
You can select a section (scene) in a title and  
erase it. Note that erasing scenes in a title  
cannot be undone.  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
For HDD titles or DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs  
in the VR mode, press </, to switch  
the Title Lists, if necessary.  
1 After step 2 of “Erasing and Editing a  
Title,” select “A-B Erase” and press  
ENTER.  
2 Press OPTIONS to select “Erase  
Titles,” and press ENTER.  
The display for selecting titles to be  
erased appears.  
The display for setting point A appears.  
The title starts to play.  
• To return to the beginning of the title,  
press X and then press ..  
3 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
next to the selected title.  
Playback point  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• To clear all of check marks, select  
“Reset.”  
2 Select point A using m/M, and  
press ENTER.  
Playback pauses.  
,continued  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 Press ENTER if point A is correct.  
If point A is incorrect, select point A  
using c/C, and press ENTER. The  
display for setting point B appears.  
Dividing a title (Divide)  
*
*
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
HDD  
If you want to dub a long title to a disc but do  
not want to reduce the picture quality, divide  
the title into two shorter titles. Note that  
dividing a title cannot be undone.  
* Only playlist titles can be divided for DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs (VR mode).  
4 Select point B using m/M, and  
press ENTER.  
Playback pauses.  
5 Press ENTER if point B is correct.  
If point B is incorrect, select point B  
using c/C, and press ENTER. The  
display asks for confirmation.  
• To reset point A, press M and  
O RETURN, and go to step 2.  
• To reset point B, press M and repeat  
step 4.  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch the Title Lists, if  
necessary.  
2 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
• To preview the title without scenes to  
be erased, select “Preview” (except for  
DVD+RWs).  
3 Select “Divide,” and press ENTER.  
The display for setting the dividing point  
appears, and the title starts to play.  
• To return to the beginning of the title,  
press X and then press ..  
6 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The scene is erased. The display for  
setting point A appears.  
• To continue, go to step 2.  
• To finish, select “Quit.”  
z Hint  
A chapter mark is inserted after the scene was  
erased. The chapter mark divides the title into  
separate chapters on either side of the mark.  
b Notes  
4 Select the dividing point by pressing  
m/M, and press ENTER.  
Playback pauses.  
• Images or sound may be momentarily interrupted  
at the point where you erase a section of a title.  
• Sections shorter than five seconds may not be  
erased.  
5 Press ENTER if the dividing point is  
• For DVD+RWs, the erased section may be  
slightly different from the points you selected.  
correct.  
If the dividing point is incorrect, select  
the dividing point using c/C, and  
press ENTER. The display asks for  
confirmation.  
• To change the dividing point, press M.  
6 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The title is divided in two.  
z Hint  
After a title is divided, the title name prior to  
division is assigned to both the first and second  
parts.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Creating chapters manually  
Creating and Editing a  
Playlist  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
HDD  
You can manually insert a chapter mark at  
any point you like during playback.  
-
RWVR  
-
RVR  
HDD  
Playlist edit allows you to edit or re-edit  
without changing the actual recordings. You  
can create up to 97 Playlist titles.  
Press CHAPTER MARK at the point where  
you want to divide the title into chapters.  
Each time you press the button, “Marking ...”  
appears on the screen and the scenes to the  
left and right of the mark become separate  
chapters.  
Example: You have recorded the final few  
matches of a football tournament on a DVD-  
RW/DVD-R (VR mode). You want to create  
a digest with the goal scenes and other  
highlights, but you also want to keep the  
original recording.  
To erase chapter marks  
You can combine two chapters by erasing the  
chapter mark during playback.  
Original  
Press ./> to search for a chapter  
number, and while displaying the chapter  
containing the chapter mark you want to  
erase, press CHAPTER MARK ERASE.  
The current chapter combines with the  
previous chapter.  
Playlist  
b Note  
When dubbing, any chapter marks you enter will be  
erased.  
In this case, you can compile highlight scenes  
as a Playlist title. You can even rearrange the  
scene order within the Playlist title.  
The Playlist title calls up data from the  
original titles for playback. When an original  
title is used for a Playlist title, the original  
title cannot be edited and erased.  
b Note  
Playlist titles containing titles recorded with the  
“Copy-Once” copy protection signal cannot be  
dubbed or moved (page 111).  
,continued  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
8 Press ENTER if the OUT point is  
correct.  
Press </, to switch to the  
“PLAYLIST” Title List, if necessary.  
If the OUT point is incorrect, select the  
OUT point using c/C, and press  
ENTER.  
The selected scene is added to the scene  
list.  
2 Press OPTIONS to select “Create a  
Playlist,” and press ENTER.  
• To add more scenes, go to step 5.  
9 When you finish adding scenes, press  
m.  
3 Select “Select,” and press ENTER.  
A Total duration of the selected  
scene  
4 Select the title you want to include in  
the Playlist title, and press ENTER.  
The display for setting the start point (IN)  
appears. The title starts to play.  
B Total number of scenes  
C Selected scene  
10 Select the scene you want to re-edit,  
• To return to the beginning of the title,  
press X and then press ..  
and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
“Move”: Changes the scene order using  
</, and press ENTER.  
“Erase”: Erases the scene. When asked  
for confirmation, select “OK.”  
• To add more scenes, press M and go to  
step 5.  
• To add more scenes from another title,  
select “Select” and go to step 4.  
• To preview all of the captured scenes in  
the listed order, select “Preview.”  
5 Select the IN point using m/M,  
and press ENTER.  
11 When you finish editing the scene list,  
Playback pauses.  
select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The title of the created Playlist is added  
to the Title List (Playlist). The title name  
is the title name of the first scene.  
6 Press ENTER if the IN point is correct.  
If the IN point is incorrect, select the IN  
point using c/C, and press ENTER.  
The display for setting the end point  
(OUT) appears.  
z Hint  
When a Playlist title is created, the IN and OUT  
points will become chapter marks, and each scene  
will become a chapter.  
7 Select the OUT point using m/M,  
and press ENTER.  
Playback pauses.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
b Note  
4 Select a new location for the title  
using M/m, and press ENTER.  
The title moves to the new location.  
• To move more titles, go to step 3.  
• To finish, select “Quit,” and press  
ENTER.  
The picture may pause when the edited scene is  
played.  
To add the entire title to the Playlist title  
as one scene (Make a Playlist)  
1
Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch to the  
“ORIGINAL” Title List, if necessary.  
Combining multiple Playlist  
titles (Combine)  
2
3
Select the title and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
HDD  
Select “Make a Playlist,” and press  
ENTER.  
The selected title is added to the Title List  
(Playlist).  
The title name is the same as the Original  
title name.  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch the Title Lists, if  
necessary.  
2 Press OPTIONS to select “Combine,”  
and press ENTER.  
To play the Playlist title  
The display for selecting titles appears.  
1
2
3
Press TITLE LIST. Press </, to  
3 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
A number indicating the order in which  
you selected the title appears.  
To cancel the selection, press ENTER  
again.  
switch the Title Lists, if necessary.  
Select a title, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
Select “Play,” and press ENTER.  
Moving a Playlist title (Change  
Order)  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
You can change the Playlist title order within  
the Title List (Playlist).  
4 Repeat step 3 to select all of the titles  
you want to combine.  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch the Title Lists, if  
necessary.  
To cancel all of the selections, select  
“Reset.”  
5 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The list of titles to be combined appears.  
To change the selection, select “Change”  
and go to step 3.  
2 Press OPTIONS to select “Change  
Order,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select the title you want to move, and  
press ENTER.  
6 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The titles are combined.  
,continued  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
z Hint  
After titles are combined, the title name is the title  
name of the first title prior to combination.  
b Note  
When the number of chapters in the title to be  
combined exceeds the limit, the chapters at the end  
are combined into a single chapter.  
Dividing a Playlist title (Divide)  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
HDD  
You can divide a Playlist title. For operations,  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
b Notes  
• You cannot make a recording while dubbing.  
• To play a dubbed disc on other DVD equipment,  
finalise the disc (page 44).  
Dubbing (HDD y DVD)  
• You cannot dub from DVD VIDEOs to the HDD.  
• Thumbnails that you have set for the originally  
recorded title (page 38) will not be retained in the  
dubbed title.  
• When dubbing to a DVD+R DL disc, the video  
may be momentarily interrupted at the point  
where the layers switch.  
Before Dubbing  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
In this section, “dubbing” refers to “copying  
a recorded title on the internal hard disk drive  
(HDD) to another disc, or vice versa.” You  
can select to dub one title at a time (Title  
Dubbing)” on page 112), or multiple titles all  
at once (Multiple Title Dubbing – see  
About “Dub Mode”  
With this recorder, the recording mode for  
dubbing is displayed as “Dub Mode.” Three  
dubbing methods are available: High-speed  
Dubbing, Original Dubbing, and Rec Mode  
Conversion Dubbing. Read the following and  
select according to the required time, disc  
space, and picture quality.  
Before you start, read the following  
precautions, which are common to both  
dubbing methods.  
Dubbing at high-speed (High-speed  
Dubbing)  
If you want to record from a digital video  
camera connected to the DV IN jack, see  
“DV Dubbing” on page 115. To record from  
equipment connected to the LINE IN jacks,  
+
-
-
,
/
/
RWVR / RWVideo  
/
RW  
HDD  
/
-
+
R
-
RVideo  
RVR  
Allows you to dub what you have stored in  
the HDD to a high-speed DVD (8x-speed  
DVD+RWs/6x-speed DVD-RWs/16x-speed  
DVD+Rs/16x-speed DVD-Rs, or slower  
versions of each disc type), without changing  
the recording mode.  
Set “Dub Mode” to “Fast” in the steps of  
When dubbing multiple titles, you can select  
“Fast” if there are one or more titles that can  
be dubbed at high speed in the selected titles.  
However, titles that cannot be dubbed at high  
speed are dubbed in the Original Dubbing  
mode.  
Before you start…  
• You cannot record both the main and sub  
sound on DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs (Video  
mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs (Video  
mode). For bilingual programmes, set  
“Bilingual Recording” of “DVD Rec.  
Settings” to either “Main” (default) or  
“Sub” in the “Recording” setup (page 146).  
• The chapter marks in the dubbing source  
are not retained in the dubbed title. When  
“Auto Chapter” is set to “On” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 146), chapter  
marks are automatically inserted at  
approximately 6 minute intervals.  
The minimum required time is as follows  
(approximate).  
z Hints  
• When you dub a Playlist title, it is recorded as an  
Original title.  
• When dubbed from a DVD to the HDD, the  
picture size and the sound types originally  
recorded are retained.  
,continued  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
b Notes  
Required times for High-speed Dubbing from  
HDD to DVD (for 60-minute programme)  
*1  
• High-speed Dubbing is not available for the  
following titles:  
Speed*2 6x  
6x  
8x  
8x  
2.4x  
– Titles recorded in HQ+.  
– Titles that contain both main and sub sounds  
(except DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)).  
– Titles recorded in mixed picture size (4:3 and  
16:9 etc.) (except DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR  
mode)).  
High- High-  
Rec. speed speed  
mode DVD- DVD+  
High- High- DVD+R  
speed speed (Double  
DVD-R DVD+R Layer)  
RW  
RW  
– Dubbing from DVD to HDD  
– Dubbing 16:9 size title from HDD to  
DVD+RW/DVD+R  
– When dubbing a title with a picture size of 16:9  
recorded in LP, EP, or SLP mode to a DVD-RW  
or DVD-R in Video mode.  
HQ  
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.  
10min. 10 min. 8 min. 8 min. 25 min.  
HSP Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.  
6 min. 6 min. 5 min. 5 min. 16min.  
40 sec. 40 sec.  
40 sec.  
• When dubbed to a DVD-RW (Video mode)/  
DVD+RW/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode), the  
“seams” that are left over from editing may  
remain on the disc. If you edit a title, use the  
Original Dubbing or Rec Mode Conversion  
Dubbing method. This will smooth out the  
“seams.”  
SP  
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.  
5 min. 5 min. 3 min. 3 min. 12min.  
45 sec. 45 sec. 30 sec.  
LSP  
ESP  
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.  
4 min. 4 min. 3 min. 3 min. 10 min.  
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.  
3 min. 3 min. 2 min. 2 min. 8 min.  
20 sec. 20 sec. 30 sec. 30 sec. 20 sec.  
Original Dubbing  
+
-
-
RWVideo  
n
/
/
/
/
/
RWVR  
RW  
HDD  
LP  
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.  
2 min. 2 min. 2 min. 2 min. 6 min.  
-
+
R
RVR  
-
RVideo  
Original Dubbing allows you to make smooth  
dubbings by de-emphasizing the “seams” that  
are left over from editing. In this case, the  
recording mode is set to the same recording  
mode that the source title was recorded in.  
To set the “Dub Mode” to “Original,” you  
must make your selection from the “Dub  
Selected Titles” display (page 113).  
Note that you cannot select “Original” when  
using the Dubbing method explained in  
30 sec. 30 sec.  
15 sec.  
EP  
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.  
1 min. 60 1 min. 60 60  
*3  
*3  
*3  
40 sec. min. 15 sec. min. min.  
SLP  
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.  
1 min. 60  
15 sec. min.  
56 sec. 60  
60  
*3  
*3  
*3  
min. min.  
*1  
*2  
The values in the above table are for reference  
only. Actual times for dubbing also require time  
for creating disc’s control information and other  
data.  
This is the maximum recording speed of this  
recorder. The recording speed cannot exceed the  
value indicated in the above table even when  
using discs that support higher recording speeds.  
In addition, depending on the disc condition, the  
recorder may be unable to record at the  
maximum recording speed indicated in the table.  
High-speed dubbing is not available when  
dubbing titles recorded in EP and SLP mode to  
DVD+RWs and DVD+Rs.  
b Note  
If the recording mode of the dubbing source title is  
unknown when dubbing from a DVD to the HDD,  
“Dub Mode” is automatically set to “SP” in the  
“Dub Selected Titles” display (page 113).  
*3  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Rec Mode Conversion Dubbing  
Dubbing restriction  
+
-
-
You cannot dub movies and other DVD  
VIDEOs to the HDD. Also, when dubbing  
from a DVD to the HDD, a grey, blank screen  
will be recorded for scenes that contain a  
copy protection signal.  
n
/
/
/
/
/
RWVR  
RWVideo  
RW  
HDD  
-
+
RVR  
-
RVideo  
R
Allows you to dub from the HDD to a DVD  
or vice versa, in a dubbing mode that differs  
from the original recordings. For example,  
when you dub an HQ title (data size is large)  
in SP mode, you can reduce the data size,  
saving more titles using less space.  
Copy  
protection  
signals  
Dubbing  
Select a mode different from the original  
recording in “Dub Mode” in the steps of  
multiple titles, all of the selected titles will be  
recorded in same recording mode.  
Copy-Free  
(No copy  
protection  
signal)  
-
+
RWVR  
RW  
,
,
-
+
RWVideo  
R
HDD  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
Copy-Once  
*
*
-
RWVR  
,
-
RVR  
z Hint  
Dubbing in the recording mode of the source title  
smoothes out the “seams” that are left over from  
editing.  
* CPRM-compatible DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR  
mode) only  
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable  
Media) is a coding technology that protects  
copyrights for images.  
b Notes  
• For a title whose picture size (16:9 or 4:3) is  
mixed:  
Move  
HDD  
– When dubbed from the HDD to DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs (Video mode), the picture size is  
determined by the setting in “DVD Rec. Picture  
– When dubbed from the HDD to DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs (Video mode) in LP, EP or SLP mode,  
the picture size is always 4:3.  
– When dubbed from HDD to DVD+RW or  
DVD+R, the picture size is always 4:3.  
• The picture quality will not improve even if a title  
is converted to a recording mode of better picture  
quality.  
-
-
,
RWVR / RVR  
Titles containing “Copy-Once” copy  
protection signals can be moved only from  
HDD to DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode)*  
(after the title is moved, the original title in  
the HDD is erased). The “Move” function is  
performed using the same procedure as  
dubbing (page 112). Titles containing  
“Copy-Once” copy protection signals are  
indicated with  
.
b Notes  
• The following titles in the HDD cannot be moved.  
– Protected titles  
– Playlist titles  
– Original titles referenced from the playlist  
• When dubbing (Move) is stopped partway, no  
part of the title will be moved to the dubbing  
target. However, note that this will decrease the  
free disc space for DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs.  
• Even if you erase a scene that contains a copy  
protection signal, the recording restrictions on  
that title are retained.  
* CPRM-compatible DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR  
mode) only.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6 Select “Dub Mode.”  
Dubbing  
7 Select a dubbing mode using M/m.  
Fast*  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
* From the HDD to a DVD only.  
Appears when High-speed Dubbing is  
available for the title (page 109).  
Dubbing a single title (Title  
Dubbing)  
8 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The remaining time of dubbing appears  
in the front panel display.  
1 Insert the DVD that you are going to  
dub to or from.  
2 Press HDD or DVD to select the  
source.  
To automatically adjust the dubbing mode  
If there is not enough available space on the  
target disc, the recorder automatically selects  
a dubbing mode with lower picture quality  
according to the available space. If there is  
insufficient disc space in the selected  
dubbing mode, the following display appears  
after step 8.  
3 Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch the Title Lists, if  
necessary.  
4 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
5 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.  
The display for selecting the dubbing  
mode appears.  
If a title with  
(page 111) is selected  
in the title list, a confirmation display is  
displayed.  
To “Move,” select “OK.”  
Select “OK” and go to step 8.  
To manually select another dubbing mode,  
select “Cancel,” and go to step 7.  
To stop dubbing  
Press OPTIONS to select “Stop Dubbing,”  
and press ENTER. When asked for  
confirmation, select “OK,” and press  
ENTER.  
A Size of the title (approximate)  
This is displayed in red when the size  
exceeds the available space on the  
dubbing target media.  
When dubbing (Move) is stopped partway,  
no part of the title will be moved to the  
dubbing target. However, note that this will  
decrease the free disc space for DVD+Rs/  
DVD-Rs.  
B Direction of dubbing  
z Hint  
C Available space on the disc to be  
You can turn off the recorder during dubbing. The  
recorder completes dubbing even after being turned  
off.  
dubbed (approximate)  
D Information about the title to be  
dubbed  
E Dubbing mode and the space that  
remains after dubbing  
(approximate)  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
E
: Indicates titles containing  
“Copy-Once” copy protection  
signals (page 111). When you  
Dubbing multiple titles (Dub  
Selected Titles)  
select a title with  
asks for confirmation. To “Move,”  
select “OK.”  
, the display  
A maximum of 30 selected titles can be  
dubbed at once.  
F Order of dubbing  
1 Insert the DVD that you are going to  
dub to or from.  
6 Repeat step 5 to select all of the titles  
you want to dub.  
2 Press HDD or DVD to select the  
source.  
7 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The display for selecting the dubbing  
mode appears.  
3 Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch the Title Lists, if  
necessary.  
8 Select a dubbing mode using M/m.  
4 Press OPTIONS to select “Dub  
Selected Titles,” and press ENTER.  
Fast*  
Original  
5 Select titles in the order you want to  
dub, and press ENTER.  
The titles are numbered in the selected  
order.  
* From the HDD to a DVD only.  
Appears when available for the title  
9 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The remaining time of dubbing appears  
in the front panel display.  
• To cancel the selection, press ENTER  
again.  
• To cancel all of the selections, select  
“Reset.”  
To automatically adjust the dubbing mode  
If there is not enough available space on the  
target disc, the recorder automatically selects  
a dubbing mode with lower picture quality  
according to the available space. The same  
dubbing mode is set for all of the titles. If disc  
space is insufficient for the selected dubbing  
mode, the following display appears after  
A Total size of the selected titles  
This is displayed in red when the size  
exceeds the available space on the  
dubbing target media.  
B Direction of dubbing  
C Available space on the disc to be  
dubbed (approximate)  
Select “OK” and go to step 9.  
To manually select another dubbing mode,  
select “Cancel,” and go to step 8.  
D “PL”: Indicates a Playlist title.  
,continued  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To stop dubbing  
Press OPTIONS to select “Stop Dubbing,”  
and press ENTER. When asked for  
confirmation, select “OK,” and press  
ENTER.  
When dubbing (Move) is stopped partway,  
no part of the title will be moved to the  
dubbing target. However, note that this will  
decrease the free disc space for DVD+Rs/  
DVD-Rs.  
z Hint  
You can turn off the recorder during dubbing. The  
recorder completes dubbing even after being turned  
off.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b Notes  
• You cannot make a recording while DV dubbing.  
• The DV IN jack is for input only. It will not  
output signals.  
DV Dubbing  
• You cannot use the DV IN jack when:  
– signal input to the DV IN jack on the front panel  
or recorder operation cannot be performed  
correctly when using a digital video camera  
camera to the LINE IN jack and follow the  
– the input signal is not in DVC-SD format. Do  
not connect a MICRO MV format digital video  
camera even if it has an i.LINK jack.  
– the images on the tape contain copy protection  
signals, which limit recording.  
Before DV Dubbing  
This section explains dubbing with a digital  
video camera via the DV IN jack on the front  
panel. If you want to dub by way of the LINE  
The DV IN jack on this recorder conforms to  
the i.LINK standard.  
Follow the instructions in “Preparing for DV  
dubbing,” and then move on to the section on  
dubbing. For more information about  
• If you want to play the disc on other DVD  
equipment, finalise the disc (page 44).  
Hookups  
DVD recorder  
Preparing for DV dubbing  
You can connect a digital video camera to the  
DV IN jack on the recorder to record or edit  
from a DV/Digital8 format tape. Operation is  
straightforward because the recorder will fast  
forward and rewind the tape for you – you do  
not need to operate your digital video camera.  
Do the following to start using the “DV Edit”  
functions of this recorder.  
to DV IN  
i.LINK cable (not supplied)  
See the instruction manual supplied with the  
digital video camera as well before  
connecting.  
DV output  
z Hint  
If you plan to do additional editing on a disc after  
the initial dub, use the DV IN jack and record on a  
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) or HDD.  
Digital video camera  
: Signal flow  
1 Press HDD or DVD to select the  
recording destination.  
If you select DVD, insert a disc (see “1.  
2 Insert the source DV/Digital8 format  
tape into your digital video camera.  
For the recorder to record or edit, your  
digital video camera must be set to video  
playback mode.  
,continued  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
b Notes  
3 Press INPUT SELECT on the remote  
repeatedly to select “DV.”  
The front panel display changes as  
follows:  
• You cannot connect more than one piece of  
digital video equipment to the recorder.  
• You cannot control the recorder using another  
device or another recorder of the same model.  
• You cannot record date, time, or the contents of  
the cassette memory onto the disc.  
programme  
position  
• If you record from a DV/Digital8 format tape that  
is recorded in multiple sound tracks, such as a  
tape with multiple sampling frequencies (48 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, or 32 kHz), no sound or an unnatural  
sound will be output when playing back the  
sampling frequency switch point on the disc.  
• In order to use this recorder’s “Auto Chapter”  
setting (page 117, 118), be sure to correctly set  
the clock on your digital video camera before  
shooting.  
• The recorded picture may be momentarily  
affected or the start and end points of a title may  
be different from what you have set if the source  
DV/Digital8 format tape is in any of the following  
conditions. In this case, see “Recording from  
– There is a blank space in the recorded portion of  
the tape.  
4 Press REC MODE on the remote  
repeatedly to select the recording  
mode.  
The recording mode changes as follows:  
For details about the recording mode, see  
5 Press OPTIONS on the remote to  
select “DV Audio Input,” and press  
ENTER. Then, select the setting for the  
audio input.  
“Stereo1” (default): Records original  
sound only. Normally select this when  
dubbing a DV format tape.  
“Mix”: Records both stereo 1 and 2.  
“Stereo2”: Records additional audio  
only.  
– The tape’s time code is not sequential.  
– If the picture size or the recording mode on the  
tape being dubbed changes.  
Select “Mix” or “Stereo2” only if you  
have added a second audio channel when  
recording with your digital video camera.  
You are ready to start dubbing. Select  
one of the dubbing methods on the  
following pages.  
6 Adjust the dubbing picture quality and  
size.  
Before dubbing starts, press OPTIONS  
to select “Rec. Settings,” and adjust the  
recording settings (page 85).  
z Hint  
You can turn off the recorder during dubbing. The  
recorder completes dubbing even after being turned  
off.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
z Hints  
• If you set “Finalise Disc” of “One Touch  
Dubbing” to “Auto” in the “DVD” setup  
(page 149), the recorded disc (except DVD-RW  
(VR mode)) will automatically be finalised after  
recording is finished.  
• You can play back a previously recorded title on  
the HDD while One Touch Dubbing is in  
progress.  
Recording an Entire DV  
Format Tape (One Touch  
Dubbing)  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
b Notes  
You can record the entire contents of a DV/  
Digital8 format tape onto a disc with a single  
press of the ONE-TOUCH DUB button on  
the recorder. The recorder controls the digital  
video camera for the whole process, and  
completes the recording.  
• When a blank space between the recordings on  
the tape continues for more than five minutes,  
One Touch Dubbing ends automatically.  
• The recorder records a blank for five minutes  
before it stops dubbing. To stop the blank  
recording, press x REC STOP.  
How chapters are created  
The contents dubbed to the HDD or DVD  
become a single title. When “Auto Chapter”  
is set to “On” in the “Recording” setup, this  
title is divided into chapters. When dubbing  
to the HDD or a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR  
mode), each shooting session on the tape  
becomes a chapter on the disc. For other  
discs, the recorder divides the title into  
chapters at approximately 6 minute intervals.  
Follow steps 1 to 6 of “Preparing for DV  
dubbing” on page 115, and press ONE-  
TOUCH DUB on the recorder.  
The recorder rewinds the tape and then starts  
recording the tape contents.  
When the recording is finished, the recorder  
rewinds the tape in the digital video camera.  
To stop during recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 Select “DV EDIT,” and press ENTER.  
The display asks if you want to start  
selecting scenes.  
Program Edit  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVR  
RVideo  
You can select scenes from a DV/Digital8  
format tape, and then automatically record  
selected scenes to the HDD or a DVD.  
To use this function, do the following:  
• If you have previously saved a  
program, the display asks if you want to  
edit an existing program or to create a  
new program. To resume editing the  
existing program, select “Saved Data,”  
and go to step 9.  
Connect your digital video camera and  
prepare for recording  
m
Select and edit the scenes you want to dub  
Using the recorder’s remote control, fast  
forward or rewind the tape to select the  
scenes. At this point, the selected scenes are  
not copied to the disc. The recorder only  
remembers the IN and OUT points of the  
scenes that you selected for dubbing. You can  
also erase or change the order of the scenes.  
m
3 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The display for setting the IN point (start  
of the scene) appears.  
The scene starts to play.  
Dub the selected scenes  
After you have selected the scenes, the  
recorder will fast forward and rewind the tape  
automatically and record the scenes to the  
HDD or a DVD.  
4 Select the IN point using m/M,  
and press ENTER.  
How chapters are created  
The contents dubbed to the HDD or DVD  
become a single title. When “Auto Chapter”  
is set to “On” in the “Recording” setup, this  
title is divided into chapters. When dubbing  
to the HDD or a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR  
mode), each shooting session on the tape and  
each selected scene becomes a chapter on the  
disc. For other discs, the recorder divides the  
title into chapters at approximately 6 minute  
intervals.  
Playback pauses.  
5 Press ENTER if the IN point is correct.  
If the IN point is incorrect, select the IN  
point using c/C, and press ENTER.  
The display for setting the OUT point  
(end of the scene) appears.  
6 Select the OUT point using m/M,  
and press ENTER.  
Playback pauses.  
7 Press ENTER if the OUT point is  
1 Follow steps 1 to 6 of “Preparing for  
SYSTEM MENU.  
correct.  
If the OUT point is incorrect, select the  
OUT point using c/C, and press  
ENTER.  
The selected scene is added to the scene  
information block.  
• To add more scenes, go to step 4.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8 When you finish adding scenes, press  
Data capacity required for the dubbing.  
This is displayed in red when the size  
exceeds the available space on the  
dubbing target media.  
m.  
The scene list is displayed.  
12 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts recording the tape  
contents as programmed.  
A Total duration of the scene  
B Total number of scenes  
C Scene information block  
To stop during recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
9 Select the scene information block  
you want to edit using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
“Move”: Changes the scene order using  
</, and ENTER.  
“Erase”: Erases the scene. When asked  
for confirmation, select “OK.”  
“Preview”: Plays the selected scene.  
• To add more scenes, press M and go to  
step 4.  
To automatically adjust the dubbing mode  
If there is not enough available space on the  
target disc, the recorder automatically selects  
a dubbing mode with lower picture quality  
according to the available space. The same  
dubbing mode is set for all of the titles. If disc  
space is insufficient for the selected dubbing  
mode, the following display appears after  
step 12.  
10 When you finish editing the scene list,  
select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The display for entering the title name  
appears. To enter a new name, select  
“Enter,” and follow the explanations on  
Select “OK” and go to step 12.  
If you do not want to change the dubbing  
mode, select “Cancel.” However, note that  
dubbing will end before the title is finished.  
b Notes  
• If you set the beginning of the tape as the IN point  
and the end point as the OUT point, the IN and  
OUT points may move slightly during dubbing.  
• You cannot set a scene to be shorter than one  
second.  
11 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The title name is fixed, and the display  
asks if you want to start recording.  
To change the disc media, select “Media”  
and press M/m. To change the dubbing  
mode, select “Dub Mode” and press M/  
m.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Copying JPEG Image  
Files  
JPEG Image Files  
Before Using JPEG Image  
Files  
HDD  
DATA DVD DATA CD  
You can copy JPEG image files under a  
selected album to the HDD of the recorder  
from a DATA DVD, DATA CD, or a  
connected digital still camera.  
Various functions can be used with JPEG  
image files:  
You can copy JPEG image files from the  
HDD to DATA DVDs.  
Copying JPEG image files  
• You can copy JPEG image files to the HDD  
of the recorder from a DATA DVD, DATA  
CD, or a connected digital still camera.  
• You can copy JPEG image files from the  
HDD to recordable DATA DVDs.  
Copying JPEG image files from  
a connected digital still  
camera  
Playing JPEG image files  
• You can view your JPEG image files on  
your TV screen.  
• You can view several JPEG images as a  
slideshow.  
You can connect a digital still camera to the  
USB jack on the recorder to copy JPEG  
image files to the HDD.  
See the instruction manual supplied with the  
digital still camera before connecting.  
The Photomovie function  
HDD  
DVD  
• You can easily create a slideshow movie  
(Photomovie) with sound and graphic  
effects using the JPEG image files stored in  
the HDD.  
• If JPEG image files are stored in the HDD,  
the recorder can create a Photomovie  
automatically even while the recorder is off  
(Auto Photomovie).  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
TITLE LIST  
To copy JPEG image files on the HDD to  
recordable DATA DVDs  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
• Before copying JPEG image files to a  
recordable DATA DVD, the recordable  
DATA DVD must be reformatted if the disc  
is blank or if it is already formatted in a  
Video mode. To reformat a disc, see  
• The recorder uses the UDF (Universal Disk  
Format) 1.02 format to copy JPEG image  
files on the HDD to recordable DATA  
DVDs.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
1 Connect a digital still camera  
correctly to the USB jack of the  
recorder.  
7 Repeat step 6 to select all of the  
albums you want to copy.  
8 When you finish selecting albums,  
select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
• To change the selection, select  
“Change,” and repeat from step 6.  
Hookups  
DVD recorder  
9 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The remaining copy time appears on the  
front panel display.  
to USB jack  
b Notes  
USB cable (not supplied)  
• Most digital still cameras can be read by the  
recorder if JPEG image files are stored. However,  
some types of digital still camera may not be read  
depending on a model.  
• Connecting USB devices other than a digital still  
camera is not supported.  
USB output  
• The “Auto categorise Albums” function can  
automatically categorise the files to be copied by  
the date of the JPEG image files. For example, if  
a digital still camera stores photo images under a  
folder that is titled with the date, this function  
creates the same album (folder) on the HDD.  
• The “Auto categorise Albums” function  
categorises the JPEG image files according to  
date from up to 99 days before the newest file.  
• The following JPEG image files are copied to the  
“_____” album:  
– Files created more than 99 days before the  
newest file of the connected digital still camera.  
– Files with no date information.  
• If the selected album contains more than 200  
JPEG image files, the recorder divides the album  
into multiple separate albums when copying.  
• You can select up to 5 albums to copy. However,  
you may not be able to select 5 albums depending  
on the number of files that are included under an  
album.  
• Make sure that the digital still camera is correctly  
connected to the USB jack of the recorder. If the  
digital still camera is properly connected, the  
USB indicator on the front panel of the recorder  
will be lit.  
• The USB indicator on the front panel blinks while  
transferring data from the connected digital still  
camera, or when mounting the camera. Do not  
disconnect the digital still camera in this case.  
The storage memory of the digital still camera  
may be damaged and fail to copy.  
• The recorder can detect and copy only JPEG  
image files. You cannot view or copy other data  
over the connected digital still camera.  
• From the connected digital still camera, you can  
copy folders or JPEG image files under the DCIM  
folder under “ROOT” (for mass storage mode).  
Digital still camera  
: Signal flow  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
3 Select “COPY PHOTO,” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Copy Direction” screen appears.  
4 Select “USB t HDD,” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Auto categorise Albums” screen  
appears.  
5 Select “Yes” and press ENTER.  
The “Auto categorise Albums” function  
can automatically categorise or create an  
album to copy according to the file  
(example: 2005-12-24).  
If you do not want to use “Auto  
categorise Albums,” select “No.”  
6 Select the albums to copy, and press  
ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
next to the selected album.  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• To clear all of check marks, select  
“Reset.”  
,continued  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• You can copy up to 1,000 JPEG image files from  
the connected digital still camera.  
• If you stop copying data from the digital still  
camera, the digital still camera may not stop  
copying right away. However, this is not a  
malfunction.  
• Depending on the model, it may take time to copy  
JPEG image files from a connected digital still  
camera.  
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The remaining copy time appears on the  
front panel display.  
To copy multiple albums  
You can copy multiple Photo (JPEG image  
file) albums.  
• With some digital still cameras, if the time for  
copying JPEG image files overlaps a timer  
recording, the timer setting may be cancelled.  
1
Insert the DVD or CD that you are going  
to copy to or from.  
2
3
Press HDD or DVD to select the source.  
z Hint  
Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch to the “Photos”  
Title List, if necessary.  
If your digital still camera has options for  
PictBridge (PTP) mode or mass storage mode for  
data transfer, mass storage mode is recommended.  
See the instruction manual supplied with the digital  
still camera.  
4
5
Press OPTIONS to select “Copy  
Albums,” and press ENTER.  
Select the albums you want to copy, and  
press ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
next to the selected album.  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
Copying JPEG image albums  
(HDD y DATA DVDs/  
HDD T DATA CDs)  
You can copy a Photo (JPEG image file)  
album to or from the HDD or DATA DVDs.  
You can also copy a Photo album (JPEG  
image files) from DATA CDs to the HDD.  
However, you cannot copy JPEG image files  
to a recordable DATA CD from the HDD.  
• To clear all of check marks, select  
“Reset.”  
6
7
Repeat step 5 to select all of the albums  
you want to copy.  
You can select up to 5 albums to copy.  
When you finish selecting albums, select  
“OK,” and press ENTER.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
• To change the selection, select  
“Change,” and repeat from step 5.  
1 Insert the DVD or CD that you are  
going to copy to or from.  
2 Press HDD or DVD to select the  
source.  
8
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The remaining copy time appears on the  
front panel display.  
If you want to copy JPEG image files on  
the HDD to a DATA DVD, press HDD.  
To copy JPEG image files to a recordable  
DATA DVD, the disc must be  
reformatted if the disc is blank or if it is  
already formatted in a Video mode. To  
reformat a disc, see page 46.  
z Hint  
You can also start the operation by selecting  
“COPY PHOTO” from the system menu.  
3 Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch to the “Photos”  
Title List, if necessary.  
4 Select an album title, and press  
ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
5 Select “Copy Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
b Notes  
To copy multiple JPEG image files on the  
HDD  
On the HDD, you can copy multiple JPEG  
image files to an existing album or an album  
that you have created.  
• Use recordable DVDs (DVD-R/DVD+R/DVD-  
RW/DVD+RW) when copying images from the  
HDD (except DVD+R DL).  
• You cannot copy JPEG image files to a  
recordable DVD which has been recorded using  
other recorders/devices.  
• If you want to play the disc on other DVD  
equipment, finalise the disc (page 44). However,  
it is possible that DATA DVDs finalised on this  
recorder may not be playable on other equipment  
1
2
Press HDD.  
Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch to the “Photos”  
Title List, if necessary.  
3
4
Select an album, and press ENTER.  
Select “View Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
Copying JPEG image files  
(HDD y HDD)  
The thumbnail pictures list appears.  
5
6
Press OPTIONS to select “Copy Selected  
Files,” and press ENTER.  
HDD  
On the HDD, you can copy a JPEG image file  
to an existing album or an album that you  
have created.  
Select the files you want to copy, and  
press ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
on lower left of the selected file.  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• To clear all of check marks, select  
“Reset.”  
1 Press HDD.  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
3 Press </, to switch to the  
• To select all files, select “Select All.”  
“Photos” Title List, if necessary.  
7
8
9
Repeat step 6 to select all of the files you  
want to copy.  
4 Select an album, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
When you finish selecting files, select  
“OK” and press ENTER.  
5 Select “View Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
Select the destination album, and press  
ENTER.  
The thumbnail pictures list appears.  
If you want to copy under the new album,  
select “New” and press ENTER, then set  
the new album title using the on-screen  
keyboard.  
• To change the selection, select  
“Change,” and repeat from step 6.  
6 Select a file, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
7 Select “Copy File,” and press ENTER.  
8 Select the destination album, and  
press ENTER.  
If you want to copy under the new album,  
select “New” and press ENTER, then set  
the new album title using the on-screen  
keyboard.  
10 Select “Start” and press ENTER.  
The remaining copy time appears on the  
front panel display.  
b Notes  
9 Select “Start” and press ENTER.  
The remaining copy time appears on the  
front panel display.  
• When setting a new album title, some characters  
are not allowed. If the message appears, select  
other characters.  
• An album title can be up to 32 characters long.  
,continued  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Notes on copying JPEG image files  
• This function copies only JPEG files  
directly stored under the album you select.  
If there is a sub-album under the selected  
album, the JPEG files under the sub-album  
are not copied.  
Managing JPEG Image  
Files  
HDD  
• If you want to copy files stored directly  
under a root folder, select “ROOT” from the  
album title list.  
• While copying JPEG image files, playing,  
recording, and timer recording are  
unavailable. “ ” appears on the “Photos”  
Title List while copying.  
b Note  
You cannot erase JPEG image files or edit album  
titles on a disc or connected digital still camera.  
Erasing an album on the HDD  
• When you attempt to play or copy a broken  
file or a file that does not satisfy the play or  
1 Press HDD.  
copy conditions,  
appears and the  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
recorder cannot play or copy the file.  
• Some JPEG image files may not be copied  
depending on the file size.  
Press </, to switch to the “Photos”  
Title List, if necessary.  
3 Select an album title, and press  
• You cannot copy JPEG image files if the  
HDD is full or almost full.  
• If the title of the album being copied is the  
same as an album already copied in the  
HDD, an incremental number is  
automatically added after the title.  
• You cannot copy rotated image settings.  
• For details about file/album number  
limitations when copying, See “Notes on  
ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
4 Select “Erase Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
5 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The album is erased.  
To cancel, select “Cancel” and press  
ENTER.  
To stop copying  
Press OPTIONS to select “Stop Copying,”  
and press ENTER. When asked for  
confirmation, select “OK,” and press  
ENTER.  
To erase multiple albums on the HDD  
1
2
Press HDD.  
Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch to the “Photos”  
Title List, if necessary.  
When copying is stopped partway through,  
no JPEG image file in the selected album is  
copied to the HDD or the DATA DVD.  
However, if an album (from a multiple set of  
albums that are to be copied) has finished  
copying before you stop, that album will  
remain copied onto the HDD or disc.  
See the “Photos” Title List of the HDD or the  
disc to check which albums have been  
copied.  
3
4
Press OPTIONS to select “Erase  
Albums,” and press ENTER.  
Select albums, and press ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
next to the selected album.  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• To clear all of check marks, select “Reset.”  
If you stop copying to a write-once disc, the  
remaining file size will be reduced even if  
you stop copying and nothing is copied onto  
the disc. For this reason, it is not  
recommended that you stop copying partway  
through.  
5
Repet step 4 to select all of the albums  
you want to erase.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6
7
When you finish selecting albums, select  
“OK,” and press ENTER.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
• To change the selection, select  
“Change,” and repeat from step 4.  
6
Select JPEG image files you want to  
erase, and press ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
on lower left of the selected file.  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
Select “OK” and press ENTER.  
The albums are erased.  
• To clear all of check marks, select  
“Reset.”  
7
8
Repeat step 6 to select all of the files you  
want to erase.  
Erasing a JPEG image file on  
the HDD  
When you finish selecting files, select  
“OK,” and press ENTER.  
The confirmation screen appears.  
• To change the selection, select  
“Change,” and repeat from step 6.  
1 Press HDD.  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch to the “Photos”  
Title List, if necessary.  
9
Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The files are erased.  
3 Select the album title, and press  
ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
Editing album titles on the HDD  
4 Select “View Album,” and press  
You can edit an album title in the HDD.  
ENTER.  
The thumbnail pictures list appears.  
1 Press HDD.  
5 Select a JPEG image file, and press  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
ENTER.  
Press </, to switch to the “Photos”  
Title List, if necessary.  
The sub-menu appears.  
6 Select “Erase File,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select an album title, and press  
The confirmation screen appears.  
ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
7 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The file is erased.  
4 Select “Album Name,” and press  
To cancel, select “Cancel” and press  
ENTER.  
ENTER.  
The on-screen keyboard appears.  
5 Select a character on the keyboard  
To erase multiple JPEG image files on the  
HDD  
using </M/m/,, and press ENTER.  
6 Select “Finish,” and press ENTER.  
1
2
Press HDD.  
Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch to the “Photos”  
Title List, if necessary.  
b Notes  
• If you enter a character that is not allowed, a  
warning message appears. Select another  
character.  
3
4
Select the album title, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
• An album title can be set up to 32 characters.  
Select “View Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
The thumbnail pictures list appears.  
5
Press OPTIONS to select “Erase  
Selected Files,” and press ENTER.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
C The title list header:  
Displays the category you select.  
Playing JPEG Image Files  
D Scroll bar:  
HDD  
DATA DVD DATA CD  
Appears when all of the titles do  
not fit on the list. To view the  
hidden titles, press M/m.  
You can play JPEG image files on the HDD  
or DATA DVDs/DATA CDs.  
3 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
HDD  
DVD  
The sub-menu appears.  
4 Select “View Album” and press  
ENTER.  
The thumbnail pictures list appears.  
TITLE LIST  
ALBUM  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
/
.
>
x
H
X
5 Select the thumbnail, and press  
ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
6 Select “View Image,” and press  
ENTER.  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
If you select DVD, insert a disc (see “1.  
b Notes  
• If the disc contains MP3 audio tracks, JPEG  
image files, and DivX video files, only the DivX  
video files are played back when H is pressed.  
• If the disc (8 cm DVD+RW, DVD-RW, and  
DVD-R recorded with a DVD video camera, etc.)  
contains JPEG image files and DVD Videos, only  
DVD Videos will be played back when H is  
pressed.  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch to the “Photos”  
Title List, if necessary.  
• When viewing images from a disc, some  
thumbnail images may not be displayed.  
• Some JPEG files, especially files of three million  
pixels or more, may lengthen the slideshow  
interval.  
• For images larger than the TV screen, the image  
size will be reduced when displayed.  
• Progressive JPEG image files are not displayed.  
• When you attempt to play a broken file or a file  
that does not satisfy the play conditions,  
appears and the recorder cannot play the file.  
A The album title list:  
Displays an album title.  
B Disc space (remainder/total)  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To start a slideshow  
Press H to select an album from the list. If  
you press H while viewing an image, the  
slideshow starts from the selected image.  
Creating a Photomovie  
HDD  
To stop a slideshow  
You can easily create your own slideshow  
movie with pre-installed sound and graphic  
effects (Photomovie) using the JPEG image  
files on the HDD.  
You can copy your Photomovie onto a  
recordable disc as a video file.  
The recorder adds graphic effects and  
background music automatically according  
to the theme you set.  
Press x.  
To pause a slideshow  
Press X.  
To view the next/previous image  
Press . or >.  
To switch an album  
Press ALBUM  
/
.
To rotate the selected image  
Press </, while displaying the image.  
You can also rotate an image while playing a  
slideshow, but the slideshow stops. To  
resume, press H again.  
HDD  
Each time you press </,, the image  
rotates in the selected direction by 90  
degrees.  
The rotated image setting will be saved  
unless:  
TITLE LIST  
– The recorder is unplugged.  
– The main power switch is turned off.  
– The disc containing the stored image is  
removed.  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
– The album is changed (when playing a  
DATA DVD/DATA CD).  
To change the slideshow speed  
x REC  
STOP  
1
2
3
Press OPTIONS on the “Photos” Title  
List.  
Select “Slideshow Speed” and press  
ENTER.  
1 Press HDD.  
Select the desired speed, and press  
ENTER.  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
Press </, to switch to the “Photos”  
Title List, if necessary.  
3 Select the album title, and press  
ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
,continued  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
z Hint  
4 Select “New Photomovie,” and press  
ENTER.  
You can also start the operation by the following  
procedure:  
On the “Photos” Title List, press OPTIONS, and  
select “New Photomovie.”  
To stop creating Photomovie  
You can stop creating a Photomovie by doing  
one of the following:  
– Press x REC STOP.  
– Press OPTIONS and select “Stop  
Photomovie,” and select “OK” on the  
confirmation screen.  
To modify the Photomovie settings,  
select “Modify” using </,, and press  
ENTER.  
b Notes  
• To store JPEG image files on the HDD of the  
• To view a created Photomovie from the video title  
• If the total time for creating a Photomovie  
overlaps other timer recordings, a confirmation  
message appears. Creating the Photomovie is  
cancelled if you select “Cancel.” If creating a  
Photomovie is selected, the recorder starts timer  
recording if time is left after creating the  
Photomovie.  
• If there is no JPEG image file on the HDD, you  
cannot create a Photomovie.  
• If the HDD is full, a warning message appears and  
you cannot create a Photomovie.  
5 Select an item using M/m and  
configure the settings using </,,  
then press ENTER.  
• “Theme”:  
Select a theme for the album. The  
recorder adds graphic effects and music  
according to the theme you set from the  
followings:  
“Natural”  
“Cheerful”  
“Sea Breeze”  
“Beautiful Days”  
“Dynamic”  
“Monochrome”  
• A Photomovie is created in the HQ mode.  
The Auto Photomovie function  
If JPEG image files are stored on the HDD,  
the recorder can create a Photomovie  
automatically while the recorder is off. This  
is called “Auto Photomovie.”  
The recorder creates an Auto Photomovie  
under the following conditions:  
– “Auto Photomovie” is set to “On” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 147).  
• “Order”:  
Select either “File Name Order” or  
“Shuffle.” The Photomovie shows your  
JPEG image files in the order you set.  
• “Title Name”:  
– The recorder is turned off.  
– JPEG image files are stored in the HDD of  
the recorder.  
Select to change the title.  
z Hints  
• An Auto Photomovie is saved as a video. You can  
recognise it as a title with “ ” in the Original  
Title List.  
• You can copy your Auto Photomovie onto  
recordable discs as video files.  
• The title of an Auto Photomovie is the same as the  
album title of the JPEG image files that were used  
to create it.  
6 Select “Create” to start.  
To cancel, select “Cancel.”  
The created Photomovie is saved as a  
recorded title in the HDD. You can view  
the created Photomovie by selecting it  
from the Original Title List.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
b Notes  
• The recorder attempts to create an Auto  
Photomovie twice a day (AM 2:10/5:10), and  
creates one Auto Photomovie a day if it is  
successful. If the timer is set at those times, the  
recorder always gives priority to the timer  
recording.  
• Up to three Auto Photomovies can be saved on  
the HDD. The newest Auto Photomovie replaces  
the oldest file when it is created.  
• The recorder does not create an Auto Photomovie  
if there is no space on the HDD.  
• A rotated image setting is not applied to an Auto  
Photomovie.  
To play a Photomovie  
You can play a Photomovie from the Original  
Title List.  
For details about playing from the Title List,  
z Hints  
• To Dub Photomovie titles, see “Dubbing (HDD  
• To edit Photomovie titles, see “Erasing and  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
3
Select “Present Time,” and press  
ENTER.  
Settings and Adjustments  
Clock and Language  
Settings (Basic)  
(Digital Mode only)  
Press M/m to set the day, and press ,.  
Set the month, year, hour, and minutes in  
sequence. Press </, to select the item  
to be set, then press M/m to set the  
numbers. The day of the week is set  
automatically.  
The “Basic” setup helps you to make clock  
and language settings for the recorder.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
To change the numbers, press < to  
return to the item to be changed, and  
press M/m.  
2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.  
The “Basic” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings  
are underlined.  
4
Press ENTER to start the clock.  
To turn off the display, press SYSTEM  
MENU repeatedly.  
Language  
DVD Menu (DVD VIDEO only)  
Switches the language for the DVD menu.  
Audio  
Switches the language of the sound track.  
When you select “Original,” the language  
given priority in the disc or broadcasted by a  
digital channel is selected.  
Subtitle  
Switches the language of the subtitles  
recorded on the disc or broadcasted by a  
digital channel (when available).  
When you select “Audio Follow,” the subtitle  
language changes according to the language  
you selected for the sound track.  
Clock  
Normally the clock is set automatically using  
the time and date information broadcasted by  
the local network package.  
If the recorder does not receive a time signal  
from any service, you may set the clock  
manually. Therefore, please proceed as  
follows.  
z Hint  
If you select “Others” in “DVD Menu,” “Subtitle,”  
or “Audio,” select and enter a language code from  
number buttons.  
To set the clock manually  
1
Select “Clock” in “Basic,” and press  
ENTER.  
b Note  
If you select a language in “DVD Menu,”  
“Subtitle,” or “Audio” that is not recorded on the  
DVD VIDEO, one of the recorded languages will  
be automatically selected.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
1
2
3
Select “Programme Setting” in “Basic,”  
and press ENTER.  
Aerial Reception and  
Language Settings  
(Basic)  
(Analogue Mode only)  
The “Basic” setup helps you to make tuner,  
clock, and programme position settings for  
the recorder.  
Press M/m to select the programme  
position, and press ENTER.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.  
The “Basic” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings  
are underlined.  
Select the item you want to change using  
</,, and change the settings using M/  
m and press ENTER.  
To turn off the display, press SYSTEM  
MENU repeatedly.  
4
To preset another programme position,  
repeat from step 2.  
System  
Programme Setting  
Select an available TV system (page 132).  
Presets programme positions manually.  
If some programme positions could not be set  
using the “Easy Setup” function, you can set  
them manually.  
BG  
Select this when in West  
European countries, except  
those listed in “Receivable  
channels” on page 132.  
If there is no sound or if the picture is  
distorted, the wrong tuner system may have  
been preset during “Easy Setup.” Set the  
correct tuner system manually in the steps  
below.  
DK  
I
Select this when in East  
European countries.  
Select this when in Great  
Britain/Ireland.  
L
Select this when in France.  
,continued  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Channel  
AFT  
Press M/m repeatedly until the programme  
position you want is displayed.  
The programme positions are scanned in the  
order shown in the table below.  
Select “On” to turn on AFT.  
On  
Turns on the Auto Fine  
Tuning function.  
Normally select this position.  
• If you know the number of the programme  
position you want, press the number  
buttons. For example, for programme  
position 5, first press “0” and then press  
“5.”  
• To disable a programme position, enter  
“00.” The disabled programme positions  
will be skipped when you press PROG +/–.  
• To select a cable or satellite programme  
position, press M/m until the programme  
position you want is displayed.  
Off  
Allows you to adjust the  
pictures manually.  
• If the Auto Fine Tuning function does not  
work effectively, select “Off” and press ,.  
Press M/m to obtain a clearer picture, and  
press <.  
Receivable channels  
TV system  
Channel coverage  
Name  
BG (West European E2 – E12 VHF  
Changes or enters a new station name (up to  
5 characters). The recorder must receive  
programme position information (for  
instance, SMARTLINK information) for  
station names to appear automatically.  
Countries, except  
Italia A – H VHF  
those listed below)  
E21 – E69 UHF  
S1 – S20 CATV  
S21 – S41 HYPER  
S01 – S05 CATV  
DK (East European R1 – R12 VHF  
Countries)  
R21 – R69 UHF  
S1 – S20 CATV  
S21 – S41 HYPER  
S01 – S05 CATV  
To enter characters, see page 42.  
I (Great Britain/  
Ireland)  
Ireland A – J VHF  
PAY-TV/CANAL+  
Sets the PAY-TV/Canal Plus channels.  
For details, see page 33.  
South Africa 4 – 13  
VHF  
B21 – B69 UHF  
S1 – S20 CATV  
S21 – S41 HYPER  
S01 – S05 CATV  
F2 – F10 VHF  
Audio  
Select “NICAM” or “Standard.”  
NICAM  
Normally select this position.  
Standard  
Select this if the sound from  
NICAM broadcasts is not  
clear.  
L* (France)  
F21 – F69 UHF  
B – Q CATV  
S21 – S41 HYPER  
* To receive broadcasts in France, select “L.”  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Programme Sort  
AutoProgramme Title Labelling  
(TV Guide Page)  
After the programme positions have been set,  
you can change the order of each programme  
position in the display list.  
Some broadcast systems provide a Teletext  
service* in which complete programmes and  
their data (title, date, programme position,  
recording start time, etc.) are stored day by  
day. A TV guide page corresponds to each  
day of the week. When recording a  
1
Select “Programme Sort” in “Basic,” and  
press ENTER.  
programme, the recorder automatically takes  
the programme name from the Teletext pages  
and stores it as the title name. The TV guide  
page numbers depend entirely on the  
broadcast itself and may be subject to change.  
If so, you may have to set those TV guide  
page numbers manually in the TV Guide  
Page menu.  
2
3
Press M/m to select the row containing  
the programme position you want to  
move, and press ENTER.  
• To display other pages for programme  
positions 4 to 99, press M/m repeatedly.  
* Not available in some areas.  
1
2
Select “TV Guide Page” in “Basic,” and  
press ENTER.  
The TV Guide Page menu appears.  
Press M/m until the selected programme  
position row moves to the desired  
programme position.  
The selected programme position is  
inserted at the new programme position.  
Select the programme position for which  
you want to set or change the TV guide  
page using PROG +/– or number buttons.  
• The TV guide page numbers (Example:  
P301) appear automatically when the  
recorder detects them.  
4
5
Press ENTER to confirm the setting.  
To change the programme position of  
another station, repeat from step 2.  
• If no page numbers are detected (P000),  
you have to set the appropriate TV  
guide page number manually.  
,continued  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
Select the TV guide page number you  
want to modify, and press ENTER.  
Clock  
Auto Adjust (Auto Clock Set)  
Turns on the Auto Clock Set function when a  
programme position in your local area  
broadcasts a time signal.  
1
Select “Clock” in “Basic,” and press  
ENTER.  
2
Select “Auto Adjust,” and press ENTER.  
4
5
Press the number buttons or </M/m/,  
to enter the TV guide page number, and  
press ENTER to confirm the setting.  
• If you make a mistake, re-enter the  
correct number.  
• To return to the original settings, press  
O RETURN.  
3
4
Select “On,” and press ,.  
Press M/m repeatedly until the  
programme position of the station that  
carries a time signal appears, and press  
ENTER.  
To set or change another TV guide page  
number, repeat steps 3 and 4 above.  
z Hint  
To view Teletext information on your TV screen  
during a broadcast, switch to your TV’s tuner by  
pressing TV/DVD.  
b Notes  
• If the recorder does not receive a time  
signal from any station, “Auto Adjust”  
returns to “Off” automatically and the  
menu for setting the clock manually  
appears on the screen.  
• In step 4 above, enter “000” if you do not want to  
use the TV guide page number for automatic  
labelling. The recorder will instead store a default  
title name (programme position, start time - stop  
time).  
• Refer to the Teletext information on your TV  
screen to obtain the TV guide page number with  
programme titles and their start times.  
• If the Teletext TV guide has a page which always  
shows the programmes for the current day, this  
page should be input for all days.  
z Hint  
If you set “Auto Adjust” to “On,” the Auto Clock  
Set function is activated whenever the recorder is  
turned off.  
• If you start recording more than three minutes  
before the programme is scheduled to start, the  
correct label information may not be transferred.  
• Note that this function may not work correctly  
with programmes broadcast from some stations.  
• If the broadcast system updates the Teletext  
information at the moment recording starts, the  
title label may not correspond to the recorded  
programme. In this case, you may have to  
manually enter the correct title (page 42).  
b Note  
The Auto Clock Set function does not work while  
the recorder is standing by for Synchro-Recording.  
To set the clock manually  
If the Auto Clock Set function did not set the  
clock correctly for your local area, try another  
station for the Auto Clock Set function or set  
the clock manually.  
1
Select “Clock” in “Basic,” and press  
ENTER.  
2
Select “Auto Adjust,” and press ENTER.  
3
Select “Off,” and press ENTER.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4
5
Select “Present Time,” and press  
ENTER.  
Digital TV settings  
(DTV Settings)  
(Digital Mode only)  
The “DTV Settings” setup enables you to  
take full advantage of Digital TV  
Broadcasting services such as favourites  
channels setting or to prevent children’s  
viewing unsuitable channels and  
programmes.  
Press M/m to set the day, and press ,.  
Set the month, year, hour, and minutes in  
sequence. Press </, to select the item  
to be set, then press M/m to set the  
numbers. The day of the week is set  
automatically.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
To change the numbers, press < to  
return to the item to be changed, and  
press M/m.  
2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “DTV Settings,” and press  
ENTER.  
6
Press ENTER to start the clock.  
The “DTV Settings” setup appears with  
the following options.  
Language  
DVD Menu (DVD VIDEO only)  
Switches the language for the DVD menu.  
Audio  
Switches the language of the sound track.  
When you select “Original,” the language  
given priority in the disc is selected.  
Subtitle  
Favourites  
Switches the language of the subtitles  
recorded on the disc.  
When you select “Audio Follow,” the subtitle  
language changes according to the language  
you selected for the sound track.  
The “Favourites” display allows you to store  
and organize your favourite channels into one  
of four TV or four Radio lists.  
For details, see page 52.  
z Hint  
If you select “Others” in “DVD Menu,” “Subtitle,”  
or “Audio,” select and enter a language code from  
number buttons.  
b Note  
If you select a language in “DVD Menu,”  
“Subtitle,” or “Audio” that is not recorded on the  
DVD VIDEO, one of the recorded languages will  
be automatically selected.  
,continued  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
2
3
Press TV/RADIO to display either the  
TV or Radio channels.  
The Radio mode is indicated by the  
Parental Lock  
The “Parental Lock” display enables you to  
lock certain channels you consider unsuitable  
and to set an age limit so that any programme  
classed above that age by the broadcaster is  
restricted.  
presence of a Radio icon  
display.  
in the  
Select a channel you want to lock using  
M/m or the number buttons, and press  
ENTER.  
A locked channel is identified by the  
icon next to the programme number.  
1
Select “Parental Lock” in “DTV  
Settings,” and press ENTER.  
• When you have already registered a  
password, the display for entering the  
password appears.  
• If you have not yet registered a  
password, the display for registering a  
new password appears.  
Press the green or red button to view the  
previous or next page.  
4
1
Press O RETURN to come back to the  
“Parental Lock” menu.  
To unlock channels  
In step 3 above, select the channel you  
want to unlock using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
The icon next to the programme  
number disappears.  
2
Enter your four-digit password using M/  
m or the number buttons, then select  
“OK” and press ENTER.  
2
Press O RETURN to come back to the  
“Parental Lock” menu.  
z Hints  
b Note  
• Press the blue button to view the list showing only  
the locked channels.  
• Press the blue button once again when you wish  
to return to the previous channel list display.  
If you forget your password, you will have to reset  
it by selecting “Password” of the “Factory Setup” in  
the “Others” setup (page 150).  
• Press  
/
while the “Lock Programmes”  
To lock channels  
display is turned on to change to the previous/next  
page.  
1
Once the “Parental Lock” menu is  
displayed, select “Lock Programmes,”  
and press ENTER.  
b Note  
If you select a channel which Parental Lock is  
activated, appears on the gray screen and it is  
recorded.  
All available TV channels are displayed.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To set the Age Limit  
2
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The “Auto Tune” display appears  
showing a tuning progress bar and the  
number of channels found.  
1
2
Once the “Parental Lock” menu is  
displayed, select “Set Age Limit,” and  
press ENTER.  
When “Auto Tune” has ended, a  
completion display appears indicating  
the number of TV and Radio channels  
that have been found and stored.  
Press M/m to set the desired age limit and  
press ENTER.  
b Notes  
• To operate correctly, this feature relies on the  
broadcaster sending the correct age classification  
for each programme.  
• If you select a channel blocked by Parental Lock,  
only a grey screen displaying will be recorded.  
Tuning  
3
Press ENTER to remove the display and  
view the first channel captured.  
The “Tuning” display allows you to tune your  
recorder automatically or to hide unused or  
unwanted programmes and also change the  
order of the programmes on display.  
Programme Hide  
This option allows you to hide (disable)  
unused or unwanted channels.  
The hidden programmes will be skipped  
when you press PROG +/– and will not  
appear in the EPG applications.  
Select “Tuning” in “DTV Settings,” and  
press ENTER.  
1
Once the “Tuning” menu is displayed,  
select “Programme Hide,” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Programme Hide” display appears  
showing all the TV or Radio channels  
available to you.  
Auto Tune  
This option enables you to capture and store  
automatically all available channels.  
1
Once the “Tuning” menu is displayed,  
select “Auto Tune,” and press ENTER.  
2
Press TV/RADIO to display either the  
TV or Radio channels.  
The Radio mode is indicated by the  
presence of a Radio icon  
display.  
in the  
,continued  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
Select a channel you want to hide using  
M/m or the number buttons, then press  
ENTER.  
2
Select the channel you want to move  
using M/m or the number buttons, then  
press ENTER.  
A tick icon appears next to the selected  
programme number and a Swap option  
appears in the display.  
Press the green or red button to view the  
previous or next page.  
4
Once you have hidden the unwanted  
channels as desired, press O RETURN  
repeatedly to return to the main menu.  
Press the green or red button to view the  
previous or next page.  
3
4
Press M/m to select the programme  
number you want your selected channel  
to appear on.  
Restoration of hidden programmes  
Hidden channels are identified by an icon  
next to the programme number.  
In step 3 above press M/m to select the  
channel you want to restore, then press  
ENTER.  
The icon next to the programme number  
disappears.  
z Hints  
• Press the blue button to view the list showing only  
the hidden channels.  
• Press the blue button once again when you want  
to return to the standard programme hide display.  
Press the blue button to swap channel  
position.  
Your selected channel appears on the  
programme number selected in step 3.  
Programme Sort  
This option allows you to change the channel  
order in the on-screen programme list.  
5
6
Repeat this procedure to move other  
channels.  
Once you have moved all channels as  
desired, press O RETURN repeatedly  
to return to the main menu.  
1
Once the “Tuning” menu is displayed,  
select “Programme Sort,” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Programme Sort” display appears  
showing the list of all tuned channels.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Digital Software Upgrade  
Technical Information  
Periodically Sony will issue upgrades for the  
software that was initially installed in your  
recorder. These upgrades will automatically  
be received and enabled. If desired, you can  
disable this option as follows:  
Select “Technical Information” in “DTV  
Settings,” and press ENTER.  
1
Select “Digital Software Upgrade” in the  
“Technical Information” and press  
ENTER.  
Manufacturer Information  
This information screen shows you the  
current version of software installed in your  
recorder.  
The “Digital Software Upgrade” menu  
option appears.  
1
Once the “Technical Information” menu  
is displayed, select “Manufacturer  
Information,” and press ENTER.  
2
Press M/m to select “Off,” and press  
2
After viewing the information displayed,  
press O RETURN to come back to the  
“Technical Information” menu.  
ENTER.  
b Notes  
• Sony recommend that you always leave this  
option set to “On.”  
Signal Strength  
This information screen shows the signal  
strength of the broadcast you are watching.  
• To receive the upgrade, the unit must be powered  
on. It will take up to 30 minutes to upgrade the  
unit. The new software will be available once the  
unit has been placed into standby, and then back  
to normal operating mode.  
1
Select “Signal Strength” in the  
“Technical Information” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Signal Strength” display appears  
with the selected channel on view in the  
background.  
The “Signal Strength” display coloured  
bars correspondences are as follows:  
2
3
Press PROG +/– to check the signal  
strength of the other tuned channels.  
After viewing the information displayed,  
press O RETURN to come back to the  
Technical Information menu.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4:3 Pan  
Scan  
Select this when connecting  
to a 4:3 screen TV.  
Automatically displays a  
wide picture on the entire  
screen and cuts off the  
portions that do not fit.  
Video Settings (Video)  
“Video” settings will adjust items related to  
the image, such as size and colour.  
Choose the settings according to the type of  
TV, tuner, or decoder (Analogue Mode only)  
connected to the DVD recorder.  
16 : 9  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
4:3 Letter Box  
2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “Video,” and press ENTER.  
The “Video” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings  
are underlined.  
4:3 Pan Scan  
Example: Digital Mode  
b Note  
Depending on the disc, “4:3 Letter Box” may be  
selected automatically instead of “4:3 Pan Scan” or  
vice versa.  
HDMI Resolution  
Selects the type of video signals output from  
the HDMI OUT jack. When you select  
“Auto” (default), the recorder outputs video  
signals of the highest resolution acceptable  
for your TV. If the picture is not clear, natural  
or to your satisfaction, try another option that  
suits the disc and your TV/projector, etc. For  
details, refer also to the instruction manual  
supplied with the TV/projector, etc.  
Video Output  
TV Type  
Sets the picture size when playing back a title  
recorded from 16:9 size video (page 85) or a  
16:9 size commercial DVD video.  
Select the playback picture size according to  
the type of connected TV (wide-screen/wide  
mode TV or conventional 4:3 screen TV).  
Auto  
Normally select this  
position.  
1920×1080i  
1280×720p  
Sends 1920×1080i video  
signals.  
16 : 9  
Select this when connecting  
to a wide-screen TV or TV  
with a wide mode function.  
Sends 1280×720p video  
signals.  
4:3 Letter  
Box  
Select this when connecting  
to a 4:3 screen TV. Displays  
a wide picture with bands on  
the upper and lower portions  
of the screen.  
720×480/  
576p  
Sends 720×480/576p  
video signals.  
b Note  
Even when a setting other than “Auto” is selected  
and the connected TV cannot accept the resolution,  
the recorder automatically adjusts the video signals  
that are suitable for the TV.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
4:3 Output  
Progressive Output  
This setting is effective only when you set  
“TV Type” of “Video Output” to “16 : 9” in  
the “Video” setup.  
Adjust this setting to watch 4:3 aspect ratio  
signals. If you can change the aspect ratio on  
your TV, change the setting on your TV, not  
this recorder.  
If your TV accepts progressive (525p/625p)  
format signals, set “Progressive Output” to  
“On.” You will enjoy accurate colour  
reproduction and high quality images.  
1
2
3
Select “Progressive Output,” and press  
ENTER.  
Select “On,” and press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
Note that this setting is effective only for  
HDMI connection.  
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The video switches to a progressive  
signal for 5 seconds.  
Full  
Select this when you can  
change the aspect ratio on  
your TV.  
4
If video signal appears OK, select “Yes,”  
and press ENTER.  
If picture is distorted, select “No,” and  
press ENTER.  
Normal  
Select this when you cannot  
change the aspect ratio on  
your TV. Shows a 4:3 size  
video with the aspect ratio as  
it is.  
Progressive Mode  
DVD software can be divided into two types:  
film based software and video based  
software. Video based software is derived  
from TV and displays images at 25 frames/50  
fields (30 frames/60 fields) per second. Film  
based software is derived from film and  
displays images at 24 frames per second.  
Some DVD software contains both Video  
and Film.  
In order for these images to appear natural on  
your screen when output in progressive mode  
(50 or 60 frames per second), the progressive  
video signal needs to be converted to match  
the type of DVD software that you are  
watching.  
16:9 aspect ratio TV  
Component Out  
Selects whether or not to output video signals  
from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks.  
On  
Outputs the component video  
signals. Select this when you  
want to view progressive  
signals.  
You can fine-tune the progressive 525p/625p  
video signal and video signal from HDMI  
OUT jack that is output when you set  
“Progressive Output” to “On.”  
Note that you must connect to a progressive  
format TV using the COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUT jacks (page 19).  
Off  
Outputs no signals.  
b Notes  
• When you set “Line1 Output” of “Scart Setting”  
to “RGB,” you cannot set “Component Out” to  
“On.”  
• When you connect the recorder to a monitor or  
projector via only the COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUT jacks, do not select “Off.” If you select  
“Off” in this case, the picture may not appear.  
Auto  
Automatically detects the  
software type (Film-based or  
Video-based) and selects the  
appropriateconversionmode.  
Normally select this position.  
Video  
Fixes the conversion mode to  
the mode for Video-based  
software.  
,continued  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
b Note  
Line3 Output  
Selects a method of outputting video signals  
for the LINE 3/DECODER jack.  
When picture noise appears after you set the  
recorder to progressive format, hold down x, and  
press PROGRAM – (minus) on the unit.  
Video  
Outputs video signals.  
Scart Setting  
S Video  
Outputs S-video signals.  
Sets the method of inputting/outputting  
signals from the SCART jacks on the rear  
panel of the recorder. Select an option for  
each of the items below according to the  
combination of jacks and methods that you  
are going to use.  
Pause Mode (HDD/DVDs only)  
Selects the picture quality in pause mode.  
Auto  
The picture, including  
subjects that move  
dynamically, is output with  
no jitter. Normally select this  
position.  
Line1 Output  
Selects a method of outputting video signals  
for the LINE 1 – TV jack.  
RGB  
Outputs RGB signals.  
Outputs video signals.  
Outputs S-video signals.  
Frame  
The picture, including  
subjects that do not move  
dynamically, is output in high  
resolution.  
Video  
S Video  
Colour System  
b Notes  
Selects the colour system when playing  
VIDEO CDs (including Super VIDEO CDs)/  
DivX video files.  
• If your TV does not accept S-video or RGB  
signals, the image will not be displayed in the  
selected method on the TV screen even if you  
select “S Video” or “RGB.” See the instructions  
supplied with your TV.  
• You cannot select “RGB” when “Component  
Out” above is set to “On.”  
• SMARTLINK is available only when “Video” is  
selected.  
PAL  
Plays a disc in PAL colour  
system.  
NTSC  
Plays a disc in NTSC colour  
system.  
Line3 Input  
Auto Display  
Selects a method of inputting video signals  
for the LINE 3/DECODER jack. The picture  
will not be clear if this setting does not match  
the type of video input signal.  
On  
Automatically displays  
information on the screen  
when the recorder is turned  
on, etc.  
Video/  
RGB  
Inputs video signals or RGB  
signals.  
Off  
Displays information only  
when DISPLAY is pressed.  
Decoder*  
Select this when connecting  
to a PAY-TV/Canal Plus  
analogue decoder. If you  
connect to a cable box/  
satellite receiver such as  
CanalSat, do not select this  
option.  
Screen Saver  
The screen saver image appears when you do  
not use the recorder for more than 10 minutes  
while an on-screen display, such as the  
System Menu, is displayed on your TV  
screen. The screen saver image helps prevent  
your display device from becoming damaged  
(ghosting).  
S Video  
Inputs S-video signals.  
* Analogue Mode only  
On  
Turns on the screen saver  
function.  
Off  
Turns off the function.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Audio Connection  
The following setup items switch the method  
of outputting audio signals when you connect  
a component such as an amplifier (receiver)  
with a digital input jack.  
For connection details, see “Step 3:  
Select “Dolby Digital,” “MPEG,” “DTS,”  
“48kHz/96kHz PCM,” and “Audio(HDMI)”  
after setting “Digital Out” to “On.”  
Audio Settings (Audio)  
The “Audio” setup allows you to adjust the  
sound according to the playback and  
connection conditions.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
If you connect a component that does not  
accept the selected audio signal, a loud noise  
(or no sound) will come out from the  
speakers, and may affect your ears or cause  
speaker damage.  
2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “Audio,” and press ENTER.  
The “Audio” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings  
are underlined.  
1
Select “Audio Connection” in “Audio,”  
and press ENTER.  
Example: Digital Mode  
2
Select “Digital Out,” and press ENTER.  
On  
Normally select this  
position.  
Audio ATT (attenuation)  
If the playback sound is distorted, set this  
item to “On.” The recorder reduces the audio  
output level.  
This function affects the output of the  
following jacks:  
Off  
The influence of the  
digital circuit upon the  
analogue circuit is  
minimal.  
– LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks  
– LINE 1 – TV jack  
– LINE 3/DECODER jack  
3
4
Select “On,” and press ENTER.  
Set the digital output signal.  
On  
Select this when the playback  
sound from the speakers is  
distorted.  
• Dolby Digital (HDD/DVDs only)  
Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal.  
Off  
Normally select this position.  
D-PCM  
Select this when the recorder  
is connected to an audio  
component lacking a built-in  
Dolby Digital decoder. The  
surround effects of output  
signals are determined by the  
“Downmix” setting item in  
the “Audio” setup.  
Dolby  
Digital  
Select this when the recorder  
is connected to an audio  
component with a built-in  
Dolby Digital decoder.  
,continued  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
b Note  
• 48kHz/96kHz PCM (DVD VIDEOs only)  
Selects the sampling frequency of the audio  
signal.  
If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment  
not compatible with DOLBY DIGITAL signals, the  
“D-PCM” signals will be automatically output even  
when you select “Dolby Digital.”  
48kHz/  
16bit  
The audio signals of DVD  
VIDEOs are converted to  
48 kHz/16 bit and output.  
• MPEG (DVD VIDEOs only)  
Selects the type of MPEG audio signal.  
96kHz/  
24bit  
All signals containing  
96 kHz/24 bit are output  
without conversion.  
However, the signals are  
output at 48 kHz/16 bit if  
copyright-protected signals  
are contained.  
PCM  
Select this when the recorder  
is connected to an audio  
component without a built-in  
MPEG decoder. If you play  
MPEG audio sound tracks,  
the recorder outputs stereo  
signals via the DIGITAL  
OUT (COAXIAL or  
b Notes  
OPTICAL) jack.  
• “48kHz/96kHz PCM” setting has no effect when  
audio signals are output from the LINE 2 OUT  
(R-AUDIO-L) jacks or LINE 1 – TV/LINE 3/  
DECODER jack. If the sampling frequency is  
96 kHz, signals are simply converted to analogue  
signals and output.  
MPEG  
Select this when the recorder  
is connected to an audio  
component with a built-in  
MPEG decoder.  
• If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment  
not compatible with 96 kHz signals, 48 kHz PCM  
will be automatically output even when you select  
“96kHz/24bit.”  
b Note  
If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment  
not compatible with MPEG audio signals, the  
“PCM” signals will be automatically output even  
when you select “MPEG.”  
• Audio(HDMI)  
Selects the type of audio signal output from  
the HDMI OUT jack.  
• DTS (DVD VIDEOs only)  
Selects whether or not to output DTS signals.  
Auto  
Normally select this position.  
Outputs the optimum audio  
signal that can be received by  
the TV based on the “Digital  
Out” setting (page 143).  
On  
Select this when the recorder  
is connected to an audio  
component with a built-in  
DTS decoder.  
Off  
Select this when the recorder  
is connected to an audio  
component without a built-in  
DTS decoder.  
PCM  
Converts Dolby Digital or  
96 kHz PCM signals to  
48 kHz/16 bit PCM.  
b Notes  
• A loud noise (or no sound) will be output if you  
connect the recorder to a TV that is not  
compatible with DOLBY DIGITAL/DTS signals  
and “Auto” is selected. In this case, select  
“PCM.”  
b Note  
When HDMI output is performed to equipment not  
compatible with DTS signals, the signals will not be  
output regardless of the “DTS” setting.  
• Set “Digital Out” to “On” when outputting  
compressed audio signals to an HDMI  
compatible TV.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control)  
(DVDs only)  
Selects the dynamic range (difference  
between soft and loud sounds) setting when  
playing a DVD that conforms to “Audio  
DRC.” This affects the output from the  
following jacks:  
Recording Settings  
(Recording)  
The “Recording” setup allows you to adjust  
recording settings.  
– LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks  
– LINE 1 – TV jack  
– LINE 3/DECODER jack  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
– DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or  
OPTICAL)/HDMI OUT jack only when  
“Dolby Digital” is set to “D-PCM”  
(page 143).  
2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “Recording,” and press  
ENTER.  
Standard  
TV Mode  
Normally select this position.  
The “Recording” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings  
are underlined.  
Makes low sounds clear even  
if you turn the volume down.  
Example: Digital Mode  
Wide  
Gives you the feeling of  
Range  
being at a live performance.  
Downmix (DVDs only)  
Switches the method for mixing down to two  
channels when you play a DVD which has  
rear sound elements (channels) or is recorded  
in Dolby Digital format. For details on the  
rear signal components, see “4. Displaying  
Information” on page 39. This function  
affects the output of the following jacks:  
– LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks  
– LINE 1 – TV jack  
HDD Rec. Settings  
Bilingual Recording  
Selects the sound to be recorded on the HDD.  
When you are in Digital Mode, this setting is  
applied when recording from externally input  
audio signals, such as audio signals from  
connected equipment.  
– LINE 3/DECODER jack  
– DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or  
OPTICAL)/HDMI OUT jack when “Dolby  
Digital” is set to “D-PCM” (page 143).  
Dolby  
Surround  
Normally select this position.  
Multi-channel audio signals  
are output to two channels for  
enjoying surround sounds.  
Main  
Records the main sound for  
the bilingual programme.  
Sub  
Records the sub sound for the  
bilingual programme.  
Normal  
Multi-channel audio signals  
are downmixed to two  
channels for use with your  
stereo.  
Main+Sub Records the main and sub  
sounds for the bilingual  
programme.  
b Note  
If you change the recording mode while dubbing  
from a DVD to the HDD, the sound recorded in the  
source (DVD) is applied regardless of this setting.  
,continued  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
HQ Setting  
Selects the HQ mode used for recording on  
the HDD (page 79).  
TV Direct Rec. (HDD/DVD+RW/DVD-RW/  
DVD+R/DVD-R only)  
Selects whether to directly start recording  
using the SMARTLINK feature (page 36).  
This setting is effective only when you  
connect the recorder to your TV via the  
SCART jacks.  
HQ+  
Records in higher quality  
(approximate 15 Mbps).  
HQ  
Records in the standard HQ  
mode.  
On  
Allows you to easily record  
what you are watching on the  
TV.  
DVD Rec. Settings  
Bilingual Recording (for all recordable  
discs except DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode)  
Selects the sound to be recorded on the  
recordable disc. When you are in Digital  
Mode, this setting is applied when recording  
from externally input audio signals, such as  
audio signals from connected equipment.  
This setting is not necessary when recording  
on DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode) that  
record both the main and sub sounds.  
Off  
Turns off the TV Direct Rec.  
function.  
Synchro Rec.  
Selects the recording destination used for  
Synchro-Recording (page 67).  
Recordto  
HDD  
Records to the HDD.  
Recordto  
DVD  
Records to DVDs.  
Main  
Records the main sound for  
the bilingual programme.  
Sub  
Records the sub sound for the  
bilingual programme.  
Auto Chapter  
Selects whether to automatically divide a  
recording (a title) into chapters during  
recording or dubbing.  
Timer Settings  
Guide Timer Extend (Digital Mode only)  
Sets the time to extend timer recording  
length.  
On  
Inserts chapter marks at  
approximately 6 minute  
intervals.  
Off (default) t 1Min. t 2Min. t 5Min.  
t 10Min.  
Off  
No chapter mark is inserted.  
Rec. Mode Adjust  
b Notes  
• The actual chapter mark interval may vary  
depending on the amount of information  
contained in the video to be recorded.  
On  
Automatically adjusts the  
recording mode to enable the  
entire programme to be  
recorded (pages 57, 82).  
• Chapter marks are automatically inserted where  
the recordings start on the tape when “Auto  
Chapter” is set to “On” during DV dubbing to the  
HDD or a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode).  
• Auto Chapter function is not available for  
Photomovie. Chapter marks are automatically  
inserted at 6 minute intervals in Photomovie.  
Off  
Turns off the function.  
Auto Title Erase (HDD only)  
On  
Automatically erases old  
titles recorded on the HDD  
(pages 57, 82).  
Off  
Turns off the function.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Auto Photomovie  
Selects whether to automatically create  
Photomovie.  
Disc Settings (DVD)  
TheDVDsetupallowsyoutoadjustparental  
control and other DVD related settings.  
On  
Off  
Automatically creates a  
Photomovie every day  
Turns off the function.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “DVD,” and press ENTER.  
The “DVD” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings  
are underlined.  
Example: Digital Mode  
Parental Control (DVD VIDEO only)  
Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be  
limited according to a predetermined level,  
such as the age of the users. Scenes may be  
blocked or replaced with different scenes.  
1
Select “Parental Control” in “DVD,” and  
press ENTER.  
• If you have not entered a password, the  
display for registering a new password  
appears.  
,continued  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• When you have already registered a  
password, the display for entering the  
password appears.  
5
Select “Level,” and press ENTER.  
The selection items for “Level” are  
displayed.  
The lower the value, the stricter the  
limitation.  
Discs rated higher than the selected level  
will be restricted.  
2
Enter your four-digit password using the  
number buttons, then select “OK” and  
press ENTER.  
Example: Digital Mode  
6
Select the level, and press ENTER.  
The Parental Control setting is complete.  
To cancel the Parental Control setting for  
the disc, set “Level” to “Off” in step 6.  
To change the password, reset  
“Password” of “Factory Setup” in the  
“Others” setup (page 150).  
When in Analogue Mode, “Password” is  
displayed at the bottom of the list.  
b Notes  
• If you forget your password, you will have to  
reset it by selecting “Password” of “Factory  
Setup” in the “Others” setup (page 150).  
• When you play discs which do not have the  
Parental Control function, playback cannot be  
limited on this recorder.  
• Depending on the disc, you may be asked to  
change the Parental Control level while playing  
the disc. In this case, enter your password, then  
change the level.  
3
4
Select “Standard,” and press ENTER.  
The selection items for “Standard” are  
displayed.  
Format DVD-RW (DVD-RW only)  
The recorder automatically starts formatting  
in VR mode or Video mode, whichever is  
selected below, when a new, unformatted  
DVD-RW is inserted.  
Select a geographic area as the playback  
limitation level, and press ENTER.  
The area is selected.  
• When you select “Others,” press the  
number buttons to select and enter an  
area code in the table (page 168). Then  
select “OK” and press ENTER.  
VR  
Automatically formats the  
disc in VR mode.  
Video  
Automatically formats the  
disc in Video mode.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
One Touch Dubbing  
Displays the following options for the One  
Touch Dub function.  
Remote Control Settings/  
Factory Settings (Others)  
Finalise Disc (for all recordable discs  
except DVD-RW in VR mode)  
Selects whether or not to finalise the disc  
automatically following One Touch Dubbing  
The “Others” setup allows you to set up other  
operational settings.  
Auto  
Automatically finalises the  
disc following One Touch  
Dubbing.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.  
Manual  
Allows you to finalise the  
disc manually.  
3 Select “Others,” and press ENTER.  
The “Others” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings  
are underlined.  
Example: Digital Mode  
Dimmer  
Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display.  
Normal  
Bright lighting.  
Save  
Power  
Low lighting. Turns off the  
lighting when the power is  
off.  
Command Mode  
Changes the Command Mode of the recorder  
if other DVD equipment is assigned the same  
Command Mode. For details, see “If you  
,continued  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Password  
Factory Setup  
You can set or modify the password that  
gives access to the “Parental Control” and  
“Parental Lock” settings.  
Allows you to select the setup settings by  
group, and return them to their default  
settings. Note that all of your previous  
settings will be lost.  
1
Select “Password” in “Others,” and press  
ENTER.  
1
Select “Factory Setup” in “Others,” and  
press , or ENTER.  
• If you have not yet set a password, the  
display for registering a new password  
appears.  
The display for selecting a group of  
settings appears.  
2
Select the group of settings you want to  
return to default from “Basic,” “DTV  
Settings,”* “Video,” “Audio,”  
“Recording,” “DVD,” “Others,”  
“Password,” and “All,” and press , or  
ENTER.  
* Digital Mode only  
3
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The selected settings return to their  
default settings.  
• When you have already registered a  
password, the display for entering the  
password appears.  
4
Press ENTER when “Finish” appears.  
b Note  
When you set “Factory Setup” to “All” in Digital  
Mode, the recorder is switched to Analogue Mode.  
Format  
You can erase all titles recorded on the HDD.  
If you wish to change your password,  
first enter your current password using  
the number buttons, then select “OK”  
and press ENTER.  
The display for registering a new  
password appears.  
2
Enter your new four-digit password  
using the number buttons, then select  
“OK” and press ENTER.  
b Note  
If you forget your password, you will have to reset  
it by selecting “Password” of “Factory Setup” in the  
“Others” setup (page 150).  
Registration Code  
Displays the registration code of DivX video  
files for this recorder.  
For more information, go to http://  
www.divx.com/vod on the Internet.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Easy Setup  
(Resetting the Recorder)  
Select this to run the “Easy Setup”  
programme.  
You can switch between Digital and  
Analogue Mode using “Easy Setup.”  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “Easy Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
Example: Digital Mode  
4 Select “Start.”  
5 Follow the instructions for “Easy  
Setup” (page 27) from step 2.  
z Hint  
You can check which Mode (Digital or Analogue)  
you are in using SETUP display. The Mode is  
displayed on the top of the display.  
b Notes  
• Check that the aerial cable is connected to the  
appropriate AERIAL IN jack before switching  
the Mode. If you switch to Digital Mode, connect  
the aerial cable to DIGITAL AERIAL IN. If you  
switch to Analogue Mode, connect the aerial  
cable to ANALOG AERIAL IN.  
• When you switch between Digital and Analogue  
Mode, timer settings for the former mode are  
deleted.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Picture noise appears.  
, If the picture output signal from your  
recorder passes through your VCR to get to  
your TV, or if you are connected to a  
combination TV/VIDEO player, the copy-  
protection signal applied to some DVD  
programmes could affect picture quality. If  
you still experience this problem even when  
you connect your recorder directly to your  
TV, try connecting your recorder to your  
TV’s S VIDEO input.  
, You have set the recorder to progressive  
format even though your TV cannot accept  
the progressive signal. In this case, hold  
down x, and press PROGRAM – (minus)  
on the unit.  
Additional Information  
Troubleshooting  
If you experience any of the following  
difficulties while using the recorder, use this  
troubleshooting guide to help remedy the  
problem before requesting repairs. Should  
any problem persist, consult your nearest  
Sony dealer.  
Power  
, Even if your TV is compatible with  
progressive format (525p/625p) signals, the  
image may be affected when you set the  
recorder to progressive format. In this case,  
hold down x, and press PROGRAM –  
(minus) on the unit and the recorder is set to  
normal (interlace) format.  
The power does not turn on.  
, Check that the mains lead is connected  
securely.  
Tuner  
, You are playing a DVD recorded in a colour  
system that is different from your TV.  
, Noise may appear in the pictures recorded  
on the HDD, which is due to the  
characteristics of HDD, and is not a  
malfunction.  
, When playing a double-layer DVD, the  
video and audio may be momentarily  
interrupted at the point where the layers  
switch.  
The channel is not found or stored or  
missed.  
, Make sure that your aerial is properly  
connected to the recorder.  
, Confirm with your dealer that you are in an  
area that can receive a digital signal.  
, Check your aerial installation.  
Picture  
There is no picture.  
There is no picture or the picture noise  
appears when connected to the DV IN  
jack.  
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off  
and on again. 2Turn the connected  
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect  
and then connect the i.LINK cable again.  
, Re-connect all connecting cords securely.  
, The connecting cords are damaged.  
, Check the connection to your TV (page 15).  
, Switch the input selector on your TV (such  
as to “VCR” and “AV 1”) so that the signal  
from the recorder appears on the TV screen.  
, Check that “Scart Setting” in the “Video”  
setup is set to the appropriate item that  
conforms to your system (page 142).  
There is no picture or the picture noise  
appears when connected to the HDMI OUT  
jack.  
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off  
and on again. 2Turn the connected  
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect  
and then connect the HDMI cord again.  
,
If you connect the recorder to your TV via  
only the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks,  
set “Component Out” of “Video Output” in  
the “Video” setup to “On” (page 141).  
, This recorder cannot record NTSC signals.  
, A scrambled channel is selected.  
, When playing a double-layer DVD, the  
video and audio may be momentarily  
interrupted at the point where the layers  
switch.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
, If the HDMI OUT jack is used for video  
output, changing the “HDMI Resolution”  
setting of “Video Output” in the “Video”  
setup may solve the problem (page 140).  
Connect the TV and the recorder using a  
video jack other than the HDMI OUT, and  
switch the TV’s input to the connected  
video input so that you can see the on-  
screen displays. Change the “HDMI  
, Place the TV and any bunched aerial cables  
farther apart.  
, The aerial cable is connected to the  
AERIAL OUT jack on the recorder.  
Connect the cable to the AERIAL IN jack.  
TV channels cannot be changed.  
, The channel is disabled (page 132).  
, A timer recording started, which changed  
the channels.  
, The channel is hidden (page 137).  
, The Parental Lock is activated (page 136).  
Resolution” setting of “Video Output” in  
the “Video” setup, and switch the TV’s  
input back to HDMI. If the picture still does  
not appear, repeat the steps and try other  
options.  
The picture from equipment connected to  
the recorder’s input jack does not appear  
on the screen.  
, If the equipment is connected to the LINE 1  
– TV jack, select “L1” in the front panel  
display by pressing PROG +/–* or INPUT  
SELECT.  
, The recorder is connected to an input device  
that is not HDCP compliant (page 19).  
, Depending on the setting combination for  
“TV Type” and “4:3 Output,” the edge of  
the screen may be hidden or displayed with  
black bands, or the left and right sides of the  
image may flicker. In this case, change the  
settings on your TV, not on this recorder.  
If the equipment is connected to the LINE 2  
IN jacks, select “L2” in the front panel  
display by pressing PROG +/–* or INPUT  
SELECT.  
If the equipment is connected to the LINE  
3/DECODER jack, select “L3” in the front  
panel display by pressing PROG +/–* or  
INPUT SELECT.  
If the equipment is connected to the DV IN  
jack, (this is usually for a digital video  
camera connection), select “DV” in the  
front panel display by pressing INPUT  
SELECT.  
Depending on the connected equipment,  
the video signals of the selected HDMI  
resolution may not be output.  
, When connecting the DVI equipment,  
720×480/576p video signals are output  
even when an option other than 720×480/  
576p is selected.  
, When connecting the DVI equipment and a  
PC monitor that is HDCP compliant, only  
720×480/576p video signals may be output.  
*Analogue Mode only  
TV programme reception does not fill the  
screen.  
The playback picture or TV programme  
from the equipment connected through the  
recorder is distorted.  
, If the playback picture output from a DVD  
player, VCR, or tuner goes through your  
recorder before reaching your TV, the copy-  
protection signal applied to some  
, Set the channel manually in “Programme  
Setting” in the “Basic” setup (page 131).  
, Select the correct source using the INPUT  
SELECT button, or select a channel of any  
TV programme using the PROG +/–  
buttons.  
programmes could affect picture quality.  
Disconnect the playback equipment in  
question and connect it directly to your TV.  
The picture is breaking up.  
, The signal strength is low.  
, Check aerial installation.  
The picture does not fill the screen.  
, Set “TV Type” of the “Video Output” in the  
“Video” setup in accordance with the  
screen size of your TV (page 140).  
TV programme pictures are distorted.  
, Reorient the TV aerial.  
, Adjust the picture (see the TV’s instruction  
manual).  
, Place the recorder and TV farther apart.  
,continued  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The picture does not fill the screen, even  
though the picture size is set in “TV Type”  
of the “Video Output” in the “Video”  
setup.  
The programme position number in the  
programme listing does not match the  
broadcast station.  
,
There may be more than one channel lineup  
for your area. To change the channel lineup,  
select “Editor” in the Menu Bar of the  
GUIDE Plus+ system (page 77).  
, The picture size of the title is fixed.  
The picture is black and white.  
, Check that “Line1 Output” of the “Scart  
Setting” in the “Video” setup is set to the  
appropriate item that conforms to your  
Programme listings for some programme  
positions are missing.  
, The programme guide data may not be  
updated. Turn off the recorder and let the  
recorder receive the programme guide data.  
, Some broadcast stations support only two  
days of data. For details, see the following  
website:  
, If you are using a SCART cord, be sure to  
use one that is fully wired (21 pins).  
GUIDE Plus+ system  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
, All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be  
received because the reception is poor.  
GUIDE Plus+ system does not appear.  
, 1Even if you complete “Easy Setup,” TV  
programme listings do not appear until the  
recorder receives the GUIDE Plus+ data.  
2Turn off the recorder, but do not unplug  
it. 3Wait for 24 hours. It may take several  
days for the recorder to receive the GUIDE  
Plus+ data for all programme positions. If  
the recorder does not receive the GUIDE  
Plus+ data after 24 hours, set the host  
channel manually (page 77).  
The programme listing is not up to date.  
, The recorder was in use during the time that  
the GUIDE Plus+ data was scheduled to be  
downloaded.  
, All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be  
received because the reception is poor.  
, The postal code is incorrect. Correctly set  
your postal code (page 75).  
Sound  
, When the recorder is connected to a set top  
box receiver, the set top box receiver must  
be turned on to download the GUIDE Plus+  
data.  
, Area numbers that cannot be received using  
GUIDE Plus+ are set. Select “Easy Setup”  
from “SETUP” in the System Menu, and  
follow the on-screen instructions to make  
the settings again (page 27).  
, The “Time Lock” function on your cable  
box is activated. Set this function to off.  
, If the host channel has changed or moved,  
the programme guide data cannot be  
received. In this case, follow the steps in  
channel” (page 76) to update the host  
channel setting. If the problem still persists  
after waiting for a day, search for the host  
channel at the following website and set the  
host channel manually (page 77).  
There is no sound.  
, Re-connect all connections securely.  
, The connecting cord is damaged.  
, The input source setting on the amplifier or  
the connection to the amplifier is incorrect.  
, The recorder is in reverse play, fast-  
forward, slow motion, or the pause mode.  
, If the audio signal does not come through  
the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or  
OPTICAL)/HDMI OUT jacks, check the  
“Audio Connection” settings in the  
“Audio” setup (page 143).  
, The recorder supports only MP3 audio and  
MPEG audio for DivX video files. Press  
AUDIO and select MP3 audio or MPEG  
audio.  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
, Any discs other than the HDD or DVD-  
RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode) cannot be used  
for recording both main and sub sounds. To  
record on the HDD, set “Bilingual  
No sound is output from the HDMI OUT  
jack.  
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off  
and on again. 2Turn the connected  
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect  
and then connect the HDMI cord again.  
, The HDMI OUT jack is connected to a DVI  
device (DVI jacks do not accept audio  
signals).  
, The equipment connected to the HDMI  
OUT jack does not conform to the audio  
signal format, in this case set  
Recording” of the “HDD Rec. Settings” in  
the “Recording” setup to “Main+Sub”  
, If you have connected an AV amplifier to  
the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or  
OPTICAL) jack and want to change the  
audio track for HDD/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs  
(VR mode) during playback, set “Dolby  
Digital” of the “Audio Connection” in the  
“Audio” setup to “D-PCM” (page 143).  
“Audio(HDMI)” of “Audio Connection” to  
“PCM” in the “Audio” setup (page 144).  
The sound is breaking up.  
, The signal strength is low.  
, Check aerial installation.  
Sound distortion occurs.  
, Set “Audio ATT” in the “Audio” setup to  
“On” (page 143).  
Sound is noisy.  
Playback  
, When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks,  
noise will come from the LINE 2 OUT R-  
AUDIO-L jacks, LINE 1 – TV jack, or  
LINE 3/DECODER jack (page 93).  
The recorder does not play any type of disc  
(except HDD).  
, The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with  
the labelled side facing up.  
, The disc is not correctly inserted.  
, Moisture has condensed inside the recorder.  
In this case, if the recorder is on, leave it on  
(if it is off, leave it off) for about an hour  
until the moisture evaporates.  
The sound volume is low.  
, The sound volume is low on some DVDs.  
The sound volume may improve if you set  
“Audio DRC” in the “Audio” setup to “TV  
, If the disc was recorded on another recorder  
and was not finalised (page 44), the  
recorder cannot play the disc.  
, Set “Audio ATT” in the “Audio” setup to  
“Off” (page 143).  
An alternate audio track cannot be  
recorded or played.  
The recorder does not start playback from  
the beginning.  
, Resume play was activated (page 91).  
, You have inserted a DVD whose Title menu  
or DVD menu automatically appears on the  
TV screen when it is first inserted. Use the  
menu to start playback.  
, When recording from connected  
equipment, set “Line Audio Input” in  
OPTIONS menu to “Bilingual” (page 68).  
, Multilingual tracks (main and sub) cannot  
be recorded on DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs  
(Video mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs  
(Video mode). To record the language, set  
“Bilingual Recording” of the “DVD Rec.  
Settings” in the “Recording” setup to  
“Main” or “Sub” before recording  
(page 146). To record both the main and sub  
sounds, record on DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs  
(VR mode).  
The recorder starts playing automatically.  
, The DVD VIDEO features an auto  
playback function.  
Playback stops automatically.  
, If the DVD has an auto pause signal, the  
recorder stops playback at the auto pause  
signal.  
,continued  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
, The DivX video file is larger than 720  
Some functions such as Stop, Search, or  
Slow-motion Play cannot be performed.  
, Depending on the DVD, you may not be  
able to do some of the operations above. See  
the instruction manual supplied with the  
disc.  
(width) × 576 (height).  
The MP3 audio tracks do not play.  
, The MP3 audio tracks are not recorded in a  
format that the recorder can play  
The language for the sound track cannot  
be changed.  
, Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the  
DVD being played.  
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits the changing of  
the language for the sound track.  
, Try changing the language using the DVD  
VIDEO’s menu.  
The JPEG image files do not play.  
, The JPEG image files are not recorded in a  
format that the recorder can play  
, Progressive JPEG images cannot be played.  
TV Pause does not work.  
, You are recording to the HDD or the HDD  
is full.  
The subtitle language cannot be changed  
or turned off.  
, Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on  
the DVD VIDEO.  
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of the  
subtitles.  
Recording/Timer recording/  
Editing  
The programme position cannot be  
changed from the programme position you  
are recording.  
, Try changing the subtitle using the DVD  
VIDEO’s menu.  
, The subtitles cannot be changed for the  
titles recorded on this recorder.  
, Set the TV’s input source to “TV.”  
The angles cannot be changed.  
, Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD  
VIDEO being played.  
Recording does not start immediately  
after you press z REC.  
, Operate the recorder only after “LOAD,”  
“FORMAT,” or “INFOWRITE” disappears  
from the front panel display.  
, You are trying to change the angles when  
” does not appear in the front panel  
display (page 90).  
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing  
angles.  
, Try changing the angle using the DVD  
VIDEO’s menu.  
, The angles cannot be changed for the titles  
recorded on this recorder.  
, The angles cannot be changed during slow  
motion playback or when playback is  
paused.  
Nothing was recorded even though you set  
the timer setting correctly.  
, There was a power failure during recording.  
, The recorder’s internal clock stopped due to  
a power failure that lasted for more than 1  
hour. Reset the clock (pages 130, 134).  
, The channel was disabled after the timer  
recording was set. See “Programme  
, The programme position was hidden after  
the timer recording was set. (See “Making  
, Disconnect the mains lead from the mains,  
and connect it again.  
, “PDC/VPS Scan Off” was selected in the  
, The programme contains copy protection  
signals that restrict copying.  
The DivX video files do not play.  
, The file is not created in DivX format.  
, The file has an extension other than “.avi”  
or “.divx.”  
, The DATA CD (DivX video)/DATA DVD  
(DivX video) is not created in a DivX  
format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/  
Level 2, Joliet, or UDF (Universal Disk  
Format) 1.02.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
, Other timer setting overlapped the timer  
setting (pages 66, 88).  
, There is no DVD inside the recorder.  
, There is not enough disc space for the  
recording.  
, The set top box was turned off.  
, The set top box controller was incorrectly  
, The settings in “Setup” in the Menu bar  
have been changed (page 75).  
, The recorder was in the process of dubbing  
(HDDyDVD).  
The PDC/VPS function does not operate.  
, Check that the clock and date are set  
correctly.  
, Check that the PDC/VPS time you set is the  
correct one (there might be a mistake in the  
TV programme guide). If the broadcast you  
wanted to record did not send the good  
PDC/VPS information, the recorder will not  
start recording.  
, If the reception is poor, the PDC/VPS signal  
might be altered and the recorder might not  
start recording.  
, “PDC/VPS Scan Off” is selected (page 88).  
, The PDC/VPS function may not work if the  
GUIDE Plus+ host channel setup is not  
complete.  
, The recorder was in the process of DV  
Dubbing.  
, A scrambled channel is selected.  
, The Channel activated Parental Lock is  
, The PDC/VPS function does not work  
when the GUIDE Plus+ data is being  
downloaded.  
Recording does not stop immediately  
after you press x REC STOP.  
, It will take a few seconds for the recorder to  
input disc data before recording can stop.  
Recording from the equipment  
with a timer  
Recording does not stop after you press  
x.  
Nothing was recorded even though you set  
the Synchro-Rec setting correctly.  
, You forgot to turn off the connected  
equipment. Turn off the connected  
equipment and set the recorder to Synchro-  
Rec standby mode (page 67).  
, The recorder was not set to the Synchro-  
Recording standby mode. Press  
, Press x REC STOP.  
Timer recording is not complete or did not  
start from the beginning.  
, There was a power failure during recording.  
If the power recovers when there is a timer  
recording, the recorder resumes recording.  
Should the power failure continue for more  
than 1 hour, reset the clock (pages 130,  
, Other timer setting overlapped the timer  
setting (pages 66, 88).  
, Disc space was not enough.  
c z SYNCHRO REC to have the recorder  
stand by for recording. Make sure the  
SYNCHRO REC indicator lights up on the  
front panel (page 67).  
, The equipment is not connected to the LINE  
3/DECODER jack of the recorder.  
, The recorder is connected to the TV output  
jack of the connected equipment.  
, The PDC/VPS function is working.  
Contents previously recorded were  
erased.  
, Data that is not playable on this recorder but  
was recorded on a DVD with a PC will be  
erased from the disc when the disc is  
inserted.  
, “Auto Title Erase” of the “Timer Settings”  
in the “Recording” setup is set to “On”  
Synchro-Recording does not complete.  
, The timer setting for the connected  
equipment overlapped the recorder’s timer  
setting (page 68).  
, There was a power failure during the  
recording.  
,continued  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
, After playing titles recorded in EP and SLP  
mode, the recording mode indication may  
change depending on the recorded  
programme.  
The recorder automatically starts  
recording when the satellite receiver is  
turned on.  
, The Synchro-Rec function was activated.  
Turn off the satellite receiver and cancel the  
Synchro-Rec function (page 67).  
The clock does not appear in the front  
panel display when the recorder is turned  
off.  
, “Dimmer” in the “Others” setup is set to  
“Save Power” (page 149).  
Dubbing  
You dubbed a title, but the title did not  
appear in the HDD Title List.  
, The title contained a copy protection signal,  
so it was moved (page 111).  
Remote control  
The remote does not function.  
, Batteries are weak.  
High-speed dubbing is not possible.  
, The title cannot be dubbed at high-speed  
(page 110). Even if A-B erasure is  
, The remote is too far from the recorder.  
, The remote’s manufacturer code returned to  
the default setting when you replaced the  
batteries. Reset the code (page 24).  
, The remote is not pointed at the remote  
sensor on the recorder.  
performed so that a title does not contain  
mixed picture sizes, it is still treated as a  
title with mixed picture sizes.  
, Different command modes are set for the  
recorder and remote. Set the same  
command mode (page 25). The default  
command mode setting for this recorder and  
the supplied remote is DVD3. Press x  
(stop) on the unit while the recorder is  
turned off to check the current command  
mode.  
Display  
The clock has stopped.  
, Set the clock again (pages 130, 134).  
, The clock stopped due to a power failure  
that lasted for more than 1 hour. Reset the  
The clock is wrong.  
Others  
, Set the clock again (page 134). If you  
cannot set the clock, wait until the clock  
data is received and the clock is  
automatically adjusted.  
The recorder does not detect a digital still  
camera connected to the recorder.  
, Make sure that the digital still camera is  
securely connected to the recorder.  
, Check if the digital still camera or a cable is  
damaged.  
The TIMER REC indicator is flashing.  
, The disc does not have enough space.  
, Insert a recordable disc inside the recorder.  
, The inserted DVD is protected (page 44).  
, Check if the digital still camera is on.  
The recorder does not operate properly.  
, Restart the recorder. Press down [/1 on the  
recorder for more than ten seconds until  
“WELCOME” appears in the front panel  
display.  
, When static electricity, etc., causes the  
recorder to operate abnormally, turn off the  
recorder and wait until the clock appears in  
the front panel display. Then, unplug the  
recorder and after leaving it off for a while,  
plug it in again.  
The recording mode indication is  
incorrect.  
, When the recording or dubbing is less than  
ten minutes, or if a picture with little  
movement is displayed for more than ten  
minutes, the recording mode indication may  
be displayed incorrectly. Note that the  
actual recording or dubbing itself was  
correctly made in the selected recording  
mode.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Five numbers or letters are displayed in  
the front panel display.  
, The self-diagnosis function was activated  
(see the table on page 160).  
“HDD ERROR” appears in the front panel  
display.  
, The hard disk error occurred. Press down [/  
1 on the recorder for ten seconds until  
“WELCOME” appears in the front panel  
display. If this does not resolve the problem,  
format the recorder’s HDD by pressing  
down the HDD button on the recorder for  
more than ten seconds until “FORMAT”  
appears in the front panel display. Note that  
all the contents recorded on the HDD will  
be erased. If this does not fix the problem,  
contact your nearest Sony dealer.  
The disc tray does not open after you press  
Z (open/close).  
, It may take a few seconds for the disc tray  
to open after you have recorded or edited a  
DVD. This is because the recorder is adding  
disc data to the disc.  
The disc tray does not open and  
“LOCKED” appears in the front panel  
display.  
, The disc tray is locked. Cancel the Child  
Lock (page 91).  
“FAN ERROR” appears in the front panel  
display.  
, Check that the vent on the rear of the  
recorder is not blocked. Then, immediately  
disconnect the mains lead. Leave the  
recorder off for a while, then re-connect the  
mains lead, and press [/1 on the recorder.  
The disc tray does not open and “TRAY  
LOCKED” appears in the front panel  
display.  
, Contact your Sony dealer or local  
authorized Sony service facility.  
The Parental Lock does not work.  
, Check the “Parental Lock” settings  
The disc tray does not open and you  
cannot remove the disc after you press Z  
(open/close).  
, Turn off the recorder. Once the clock  
appears in the front panel display,  
Mechanical sound is heard when the  
recorder is off.  
, While the recorder is updating the EPG  
information or during a timer recording,  
operational noises (such as the internal fan)  
may be heard, even when the power is off.  
This is not a malfunction.  
, While the recorder is adjusting the clock for  
the Auto Clock Set function, scanning the  
programme positions for the PDC/VPS  
function or updating the EPG information,  
operational noises (such as the internal fan)  
may be heard, even when the power is off.  
This is not a malfunction.  
disconnect the mains lead. (If the recorder  
does not turn off or if the clock does not  
appear in the front panel display, disconnect  
the mains lead anyway.) Connect the mains  
lead again while pressing down A on the  
recorder, and release the button when the  
disc tray opens. Then, keep [/1 on the  
recorder pressed for about ten seconds until  
“WELCOME” appears in the front panel  
display.  
“RECOVERY” appears in the front panel  
display.  
, The recorder’s recovery function was  
activated when the recorder was turned on  
because the power was turned off or failed  
during recording. Leave the recorder on  
until “RECOVERY” disappears from the  
front panel display.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Self-diagnosis Function Notes About This  
(When letters/numbers  
appear in the display)  
Recorder  
On operation  
• If the recorder is brought directly from a  
cold to a warm location, or is placed in a  
very damp room, moisture may condense  
on the lenses inside the recorder. Should  
this occur, the recorder may not operate  
properly. In this case, if the recorder is on,  
leave it on (if it is off, leave it off) for about  
an hour until the moisture evaporates.  
• When you move the recorder, take out any  
discs and do not apply shock or vibration to  
the hard disk drive. If you don’t, the disc or  
hard disk drive may be damaged (page 3).  
When the self-diagnosis function is activated  
to prevent the recorder from malfunctioning,  
a five-character service number (e.g., C 13  
00) with a combination of a letter and four  
numbers appears in the front panel display. In  
this case, check the following table.  
First three  
Cause and/or corrective  
characters of action  
the service  
number  
C 13  
There is a problem in the  
HDD.  
On adjusting volume  
, Contact your nearest  
Sony dealer or local  
authorized service  
facility.  
The DVD is dirty.  
, Clean the disc with a soft  
cloth.  
Do not turn up the volume while listening to  
a section with very low level inputs or no  
audio signals. If you do, the speakers may be  
damaged when a peak level section is played.  
On cleaning  
C 31  
E XX  
The DVD/CD is not inserted  
correctly.  
Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a  
soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild  
detergent solution. Do not use any type of  
abrasive pad, scouring powder or solvent  
such as alcohol or benzine.  
, Re-insert the disc  
correctly.  
To prevent a malfunction, the  
(xx is a number) recorder has performed the  
self-diagnosis function.  
, Contact your nearest  
Sony dealer or local  
On cleaning discs, disc/lens cleaners  
Do not use cleaning discs or disc/lens  
cleaners (including wet or spray types).  
These may cause the recorder to  
malfunction.  
authorized Sony service  
facility and give the five-  
character service number.  
Example: E 61 10  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notes about the discs  
• To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its  
edge. Do not touch the surface. Dust,  
fingerprints, or scratches on the disc may  
cause it to malfunction.  
Specifications  
System  
Laser: Semiconductor laser  
Transmission standards (Digital  
Mode): DVB-T  
Channel coverage (Digital Mode):  
UHF: B21 to B69  
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or  
heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave  
it in a car parked in direct sunlight as the  
temperature may rise considerably inside  
the car.  
• After playing, store the disc in its case.  
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe  
the disc from the centre out.  
Channel coverage (Analogue  
Mode):  
PAL/SECAM (B/G, D/K, I, L)  
VHF: E2 to E12, R1 to R12, F2 to F10,  
Italian A to H, Ireland A to J, South  
Africa 4 to 13  
UHF: E21 to E69, R21 to R69, B21 to  
B69, F21 to F69  
CATV: S01 to S05, S1 to S20, France  
B to Q  
HYPER: S21 to S41  
• Do not use solvents such as benzine,  
thinner, commercially available cleaners, or  
anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs.  
• Do not use the following discs.  
– A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g.,  
card, heart).  
The above channel coverage merely ensures  
the channel reception within these ranges. It  
does not guarantee the ability to receive  
signals in all circumstances. For details, see  
Mode only).  
– A disc with a label or sticker on it.  
– A disc that has cellophane tape or sticker  
adhesive on it.  
Aerial out: 75-ohm asymmetrical aerial  
socket  
Timer: Clock: Quartz locked/Timer  
indication: 24-hour cycle (digital)/  
Power back-up duration: 1 hour  
Video recording format: MPEG-2,  
MPEG-1  
On replacement of parts  
In the event that this unit is repaired, repaired  
parts may be collected for reuse or recycling  
purposes.  
Audio recording format/applicable  
bit rate: Dolby Digital 2 ch  
256 kbps/128 kbps (in EP and SLP  
mode)  
Inputs and outputs  
LINE 2 OUT  
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/10 kilohms  
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p  
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,  
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)  
LINE 2 IN  
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/more than  
22 kilohms  
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p  
,continued  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,  
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)  
LINE 1 – TV: 21-pin  
Notes on MP3 Audio  
Tracks, JPEG Image  
Files, and DivX Video  
Files  
CVBS IN/OUT  
S-Video/RGB OUT (upstream)  
LINE 3/DECODER: 21-pin  
CVBS IN/OUT  
S-Video/RGB IN  
S-Video OUT (downstream)  
Decoder (Analogue Mode only)  
DV IN: 4-pin/i.LINK S100  
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL):  
Optical output jack/–18 dBm  
(wave length: 660 nm)  
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL): Phono jack/  
0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
(Y, PB/CB, PR/CR):  
About MP3 audio tracks, JPEG  
image files, and DivX video  
files  
MP3 is an audio compression technology that  
satisfies certain ISO/MPEG regulations.  
JPEG is an image compression technology.  
You can play MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3)  
format audio tracks and JPEG image files on  
the HDD or DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/  
CD-RWs) or JPEG image files on the HDD  
or DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/  
DVD+Rs/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs).  
DATA DVDs must be recorded according to  
ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, Joliet, or UDF  
(Universal Disk Format) 1.02 format for the  
recorder to recognise the MP3 tracks, JPEG  
image files, and DivX video files.  
Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,  
PB/CB: 0.7 Vp-p, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p  
G-LINK: mini jack  
HDMI OUT: HDMI 19pin-Standard  
Connector  
USB: USB jack (For connecting digital  
still cameras)  
General  
DATA CDs must be recorded according to  
ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2 or Joliet format for  
the recorder to recognise the MP3 tracks,  
JPEG image files, and DivX video files.  
Power requirements: 220-240 V AC,  
50/60 Hz  
Power consumption: 58 W  
Dimensions (approx.):  
430 × 73 × 328 mm (width/height/  
depth) incl. projecting parts  
Hard disk drive capacity: 250 GB  
Mass (approx.): 4.8 kg  
Operating temperature: 5ºC to 35ºC  
Operating humidity: 25% to 80%  
Supplied accessories:  
Mains lead (1)  
®
DivX is a video file compression  
technology, developed by DivX, Inc. This  
®
product is an official DivX Certified  
product. You can play DATA CDs and  
DATA DVDs that contain DivX video files.  
You can also play discs recorded in  
MultiSession/Border.  
See the instructions supplied with the disc  
drives and the recording software (not  
supplied) for details on the recording format.  
Aerial cable (1)  
Note on MultiSession/Border discs  
If audio tracks and images in Music CD  
format or Video CD format are recorded in  
the first session/border, only the first session/  
border will be played back.  
Remote commander (remote) (1)  
Set top box controller (1)  
R6 (size AA) batteries (2)  
Specifications and design are subject to  
change without notice.  
b Note  
The recorder supports also DATA CDs/DATA  
DVDs created in the Packet Write format, but some  
types of the format may not be detected.  
Compatible colour systems  
This recorder is designed to record using the  
PAL colour system and play back using the  
PAL or NTSC colour systems.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
• This recorder supports MP3 audio bit rates up to  
320 kbps.  
• No more than a 4 GB MP3 audio track or no more  
than a 50 MB JPEG image file can be played.  
• The recorder cannot play a DivX video file of size  
more than 720 (width) × 576 (height)/4 GB.  
MP3 audio tracks, JPEG image  
files, or DivX video files that  
the recorder can play  
The recorder can play the following tracks  
and files:  
– MP3 audio tracks with the extension  
“.mp3.”  
– JPEG image files with the extension “.jpeg”  
or “.jpg.”  
– JPEG image files that conform to the DCF*  
image file format.  
– DivX video file with the extension “.avi” or  
“.divx.”  
* “Design rule for Camera File system”: Image  
standards for digital cameras regulated by JEITA  
(Japan Electronics and Information Technology  
Industries Association).  
Notes on copying JPEG image files/MP3  
audio tracks  
• You cannot copy JPEG image files/MP3  
audio tracks to the HDD if:  
– The total space used by JPEG image files/  
MP3 audio tracks in the HDD equals 13  
GB, or will exceed 13 GB after the file is  
copied.  
The space set aside in the HDD for JPEG  
image files/MP3 audio tracks is limited to  
13 GB. You cannot save JPEG image  
files/MP3 audio tracks over that capacity  
even if there is space for video recording.  
– The total number of JPEG image albums/  
MP3 audio track albums on the HDD  
equals 200.  
z Hints  
• If you add numbers (01, 02, 03, etc.) to the front  
of the track/file names when you store the tracks  
(or files) in a disc, the tracks and files will be  
played in that order.  
– The total number of JPEG image albums  
on the HDD equals 100.  
• Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start  
playback, it is recommended that you create  
albums with no more than two trees.  
– The total number of MP3 audio track  
albums on the HDD equals 200.  
– The total number of JPEG image files/  
MP3 audio tracks under an album equals  
200.  
– The MP3 audio tracks are 200MB or  
larger.  
– The JPEG image files are 50MB or larger.  
• If 3,000 MP3 audio tracks are stored on the  
HDD, up to 2,500 JPEG image files can be  
copied.  
• MP3 audio tracks cannot be copied if 4,000  
JPEG image files are stored on the HDD.  
• Note that the size of JPEG image files  
copied to the HDD may be automatically  
increased to fit the TV screen.  
b Notes  
• The recorder will play any data with the extension  
“.mp3,” “.jpeg,” “.jpg,” “.avi,” or “.divx” even if  
they are not in MP3, JPEG, or DivX format.  
Playing these data may generate a loud noise  
which could damage your speaker system.  
• Albums, tracks, or files containing characters  
such as ” * / : < > ? ¥ | \ cannot be displayed or  
played.  
• The recorder does not conform to audio tracks in  
mp3PRO format.  
• The recorder may not play a DivX video file  
when the file has been combined from two or  
more DivX video files.  
• You cannot copy JPEG image files onto a  
DATA DVD finalised on other recorders or  
devices.  
• If a warning message indicating that the  
HDD is full appears, erase several albums  
or files to make space. For details on  
erasing files, see page 98 or 124.  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may not  
be possible. For example, the picture may be  
unclear, playback may not appear smooth, the  
sound may skip, and so on.  
• Depending on the disc, playback may take some  
time to start.  
• Some files cannot be played.  
• For MP3 audio tracks, JPEG image files, or DivX  
video files each, the recorder can play up to 200  
albums on a DATA CD or DATA DVD. Up to  
200 tracks and files under an album can be  
played. In total, no more than 9999 tracks and  
files in a disc can be played.  
• Proceeding to the next or another album may take  
some time.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
i.LINK baud rate  
About i.LINK  
i.LINK’s maximum baud rate varies  
according to the equipment. Three maximum  
baud rates are defined:  
S100 (approx. 100 Mbps*)  
S200 (approx. 200 Mbps)  
The DV IN jack on this recorder is i.LINK-  
compliant for digital video cameras. This  
section describes the i.LINK standard and its  
features.  
S400 (approx. 400 Mbps)  
What is i.LINK?  
The baud rate is listed under “Specifications”  
in the instruction manual of each equipment.  
It is also indicated near the i.LINK jack on  
some equipment.  
The maximum baud rate of equipment on  
which it is not indicated such as this unit is  
“S100.”  
When units are connected to equipment  
having a different maximum baud rate, the  
baud rate sometimes differs from the  
indicated baud rate.  
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for  
handling digital video, digital audio and other  
data in two directions between equipment  
having the i.LINK jack, and for controlling  
other equipment.  
i.LINK-compatible equipment can be  
connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible  
applications are operations and data  
transactions with various digital AV  
equipment. When two or more i.LINK-  
compatible equipment are connected to this  
recorder in a daisy chain, operations and data  
transactions are possible with not only the  
equipment that this recorder is connected to  
but also with other devices via the directly  
connected equipment.  
* What is Mbps?  
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the  
amount of data that can be sent or received in one  
second. For example, a baud rate of 100 Mbps  
means that 100 megabits of data can be sent in  
one second.  
Note, however, that the method of operation  
sometimes varies according to the  
characteristics and specifications of the  
equipment to be connected, and that  
operations and data transactions are  
sometimes not possible on some connected  
equipment.  
i.LINK functions on this  
recorder  
For details on how to dub when this recorder  
is connected to other video equipment having  
DV jacks, see page 115.  
The DV jack on this recorder can only input  
DVC-SD signals. It cannot output signals.  
The DV jack will not accept MICRO MV  
signals from equipment such as a MICRO  
MV digital video camera with an i.LINK  
jack.  
b Note  
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be  
connected to this recorder by the i.LINK cable (DV  
connecting cable). When connecting this recorder  
to i.LINK-compatible equipment having two or  
more i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), see the instruction  
manual of the equipment to be connected.  
For further precautions, see the notes on  
For details on precautions when connecting  
this recorder, also see the instruction manuals  
for the equipment to be connected.  
About the name “i.LINK”  
i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394  
data transport bus proposed by SONY, and is  
a trademark approved by many corporations.  
IEEE 1394 is an international standard  
standardized by the Institute of Electrical and  
Electronics Engineers.  
Required i.LINK cable  
Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable  
(during DV dubbing).  
i.LINK and are trademarks.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Guide to Parts and Controls  
For more information, see the pages in parentheses.  
Remote  
L DISPLAY button (39)  
TIME/TEXT button (39)  
M
Coloured multimedia applications &  
interactive services control buttons (48)  
CHAPTER MARK button (105)  
CHAPTER MARK ERASE button (105)  
N SYSTEM MENU button (118, 130)  
TITLE LIST button (37, 90, 102)  
GUIDE (Electronic Programme  
Guide) button (48, 59, 70)  
O
P
INFO/ (information) button (50, 70)  
(favourite) button (52, 53)  
Q O RETURN button (27)  
R </M/m/,/ENTER button (27)  
S
PAGE/ALBUM  
/
buttons(37,99)  
T OPTIONS button (46)  
U ./> (previous/next)/DAY +/–  
buttons (92)  
V mc  
/
CM (search/slow/  
freeze frame) buttons (92)  
W [TIMER] button (56, 82)  
X H (play) button (90)  
X (pause) button (92)  
A HDD button (35)  
x (stop) button (90)  
The H button has a tactile dot*.  
TV/RADIO button (52)  
B [/1 (on/standby) button (27)  
C Z (open/close) button (35)  
Y z REC button (35)  
D PROG (programme) +/– buttons (35)  
x REC STOP button (35)  
c z SYNCHRO REC button (67)  
REC MODE button (35)  
The + button has a tactile dot*.  
E Number buttons (59, 96)  
The number 5 button has a tactile dot*.  
wj TV 2(volume) +/– buttons (24)  
Z TV [/1 (on/standby) button (24)  
wl TV/DVD button (24)  
F INPUT SELECT button (68, 115)  
G AUDIO button (92)  
The AUDIO button has a tactile dot*.  
e; TV t button (24)  
H SUBTITLE button (92)  
ea TV PROG (programme) +/– buttons (24)  
I MENU button (90)  
The + button has a tactile dot*.  
J
(text) button (52)  
* Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating  
the recorder.  
K TOP MENU button (90)  
,continued  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Front panel  
A [/1 (on/standby) button (27)  
B Front panel display (167)  
C Disc tray (35)  
K HDD button/indicator (35)  
DVD button/indicator (35)  
L
M
USB jack (120)  
DV IN jack (115)  
D A (open/close) button (35)  
N ONE-TOUCH DUB button (117)  
E USB indicator (120)  
TIMER REC indicator (56)  
SYNCHRO REC indicator (67)  
O PROGRAM +/– buttons (35)  
The + button has a tactile dot*.  
P INPUT SELECT button (67, 115)  
F H (play) button (90)  
Q REC MODE button (35)  
G x (stop) button (90)  
R LINE 2 IN (S VIDEO/VIDEO/  
H
(remote sensor) (24)  
L(MONO) AUDIO R) jacks (31)  
I z REC button (35)  
J x REC STOP button (35)  
* Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating  
the recorder.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front panel display  
SMARTLINK  
DVD NICAM  
VCD TV  
HDD  
DVD  
• Programme position  
A HDD/DVD indicators  
• TV Direct Rec. indication (35):  
“TV” appears in the right most two  
digits.  
Displays the selected media and the  
playing/recording status.  
B Dubbing direction indicator  
1
E NICAM indicator* (80)  
C SMARTLINK indicator (20)  
F TV indicator (35)  
D Displays the following:  
• Playing time/remaining time  
• Current title/chapter/track/index  
number  
2
G Disc type*  
H
(angle) indicator (90)  
*1  
• Recording time/recording mode  
• Clock  
Analogue Mode only  
Displays DATA CDs as “CD.”  
*2  
Rear panel  
A ANALOG AERIAL IN/OUT jacks  
F AC IN terminal (23)  
G LINE 1 – TV jack (19)  
B HDMI OUT (high-definition  
H LINE 2 OUT (S VIDEO) jack (19)  
multimedia interface out) jack (19, 22)  
I LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L/VIDEO)  
C DIGITAL AERIAL IN/OUT jacks  
jacks (19, 22)  
J DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL/  
D COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
OPTICAL) jack (22)  
(Y, PB/CB, PR/CR) jacks (19)  
K G-LINK jack (15)  
E LINE 3/DECODER jack (30)  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Language Code List  
For details, see page 130 or 135.  
The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.  
Code Language  
Code Language  
Code Language  
Code Language  
1027 Afar  
1183 Irish  
1347 Maori  
1507 Samoan  
1508 Shona  
1509 Somali  
1511 Albanian  
1512 Serbian  
1513 Siswati  
1514 Sesotho  
1515 Sundanese  
1516 Swedish  
1517 Swahili  
1521 Tamil  
1028 Abkhazian  
1032 Afrikaans  
1039 Amharic  
1044 Arabic  
1045 Assamese  
1051 Aymara  
1052 Azerbaijani  
1053 Bashkir  
1057 Byelorussian  
1059 Bulgarian  
1060 Bihari  
1061 Bislama  
1066 Bengali;  
Bangla  
1067 Tibetan  
1070 Breton  
1079 Catalan  
1093 Corsican  
1097 Czech  
1103 Welsh  
1105 Danish  
1109 German  
1130 Bhutani  
1142 Greek  
1144 English  
1145 Esperanto  
1149 Spanish  
1150 Estonian  
1151 Basque  
1157 Persian  
1165 Finnish  
1166 Fiji  
1186 Scots Gaelic  
1194 Galician  
1196 Guarani  
1203 Gujarati  
1209 Hausa  
1349 Macedonian  
1350 Malayalam  
1352 Mongolian  
1353 Moldavian  
1356 Marathi  
1357 Malay  
1358 Maltese  
1363 Burmese  
1365 Nauru  
1217 Hindi  
1226 Croatian  
1229 Hungarian  
1233 Armenian  
1235 Interlingua  
1239 Interlingue  
1245 Inupiak  
1248 Indonesian  
1253 Icelandic  
1254 Italian  
1257 Hebrew  
1261 Japanese  
1269 Yiddish  
1283 Javanese  
1287 Georgian  
1297 Kazakh  
1298 Greenlandic  
1299 Cambodian  
1300 Kannada  
1301 Korean  
1305 Kashmiri  
1307 Kurdish  
1311 Kirghiz  
1369 Nepali  
1376 Dutch  
1525 Telugu  
1527 Tajik  
1528 Thai  
1379 Norwegian  
1393 Occitan  
1403 (Afan)Oromo  
1408 Oriya  
1417 Punjabi  
1428 Polish  
1435 Pashto;  
Pushto  
1436 Portuguese  
1463 Quechua  
1481 Rhaeto-  
Romance  
1482 Kirundi  
1483 Romanian  
1489 Russian  
1491 Kinyarwanda  
1495 Sanskrit  
1498 Sindhi  
1501 Sangho  
1502 Serbo-  
Croatian  
1529 Tigrinya  
1531 Turkmen  
1532 Tagalog  
1534 Setswana  
1535 Tonga  
1538 Turkish  
1539 Tsonga  
1540 Tatar  
1543 Twi  
1557 Ukrainian  
1564 Urdu  
1572 Uzbek  
1581 Vietnamese  
1587 Volap k  
1613 Wolof  
1632 Xhosa  
1665 Yoruba  
1684 Chinese  
1697 Zulu  
1313 Latin  
1326 Lingala  
1327 Laothian  
1332 Lithuanian  
1334 Latvian;  
Lettish  
1171 Faroese  
1174 French  
1181 Frisian  
1503 Singhalese  
1505 Slovak  
1506 Slovenian  
1345 Malagasy  
1703  
Not specified  
Area Code  
For details, see page 147.  
Code Area  
Code Area  
Code Area  
Code Area  
2044 Argentina  
2047 Australia  
2046 Austria  
2057 Belgium  
2070 Brazil  
2079 Canada  
2090 Chile  
2165 Finland  
2174 France  
2109 Germany  
2248 India  
2238 Indonesia  
2254 Italy  
2276 Japan  
2304 Korea  
2363 Malaysia  
2362 Mexico  
2149 Spain  
2376 Netherlands  
2390 New Zealand  
2379 Norway  
2427 Pakistan  
2424 Philippines  
2436 Portugal  
2489 Russia  
2499 Sweden  
2086 Switzerland  
2528 Thailand  
2184 United  
Kingdom  
2092 China  
2115 Denmark  
2501 Singapore  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Copy control signals 56,  
B
Index  
“Basic” 130, 131  
“Copy File” 123  
Copy-Free 56, 80  
Copy-Never 56, 80  
Copy-Once 56, 80  
CPRM 11  
Batteries 24  
“Bilingual” 67, 68  
“Bilingual Recording”  
Words in quotations appear  
in the on-screen displays.  
Numerics  
16:9 27, 140  
Bilingual recording 80  
“BNR” 93  
“Create a Playlist” 106  
Creating chapters 105  
“Brightness” 63, 86, 93  
4:3 Letter Box 27, 140  
4:3 Pan Scan 27, 140  
“48kHz/96kHz PCM” 144  
D
C
DATA CD 12  
“Decoder” 33  
“Digital Out” 143  
Digital Services  
Digital Text viewing  
Cable box 17  
A
Canal Plus 32  
“A-B Erase” 103  
Adjusting  
“Change Angle” 90  
“Change Order” 107  
“Channel” 132  
Chapter 40, 63, 86, 105  
CHAPTER MARK  
ERASE 105  
playback picture 93  
playback sound 94  
recording picture 62,  
EPG 48  
Favourites 52  
Index 54  
Programme  
Aerial 15  
“AFT” 132  
Album 40  
Chapter number 40, 105  
“Chapter Search” 96  
Chasing Playback 95  
“Check Overlap” 64, 65  
Checking/changing/  
cancelling timer settings  
information 50  
Digital Software Upgrade  
“Album Name” 99, 125  
Album number 40  
“Album Search” 96  
Analogue or Digital Mode  
Angle 90  
Area code 168  
AUDIO 92  
“Audio” 130, 135, 143  
“Audio ATT” 143  
“Audio Connection” 28,  
Digital video camera 115  
“Dimmer” 149  
“Disc Information” 41,  
Child Lock 91  
Disc Settings 43, 46, 147  
Disc space 41, 102  
Disc types 10, 101  
“Divide” 104  
Clock 27, 130, 134  
“Colour” 63, 86, 93  
“Colour System” 142  
Colour systems 162  
“Combine” 107  
DivX video files 90  
Dolby Digital 22, 143  
“Downmix” 145  
DTS 144  
DTV Settings 135  
“Dub Mode” 109, 119  
Dubbing  
“Command Mode” 26,  
Audio cord 22  
“Audio DRC” 145  
“Audio Settings” 94  
“Auto Adjust” 134  
“Auto Chapter” 146  
Auto Clock Set 134  
“Auto Display” 142  
“Auto Title Erase” 57, 82,  
Component Out 27, 141  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUT 20  
Connecting  
“Dub Mode” 109  
High-speed Dubbing  
Original Dubbing 110  
Rec Mode  
the aerial cable 15  
the audio cords 22  
the set top box  
controller 15  
the video cords 19  
“Contrast” 63, 86, 93  
Controlling TVs with the  
remote 24  
Auto Tune 137  
“AV SYNC” 94  
Conversion  
Dubbing 111  
“DV Audio Input” 116  
“Copy Album” 97, 122  
,continued  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DV Dubbing 115  
One Touch Dubbing  
F
J
“Factory Setup” 150  
Favourites  
JPEG image files  
copying 120  
managing 124  
Program Edit 118  
Setting a favourite list  
Watching or listening  
to a favourite  
“DV EDIT” 118  
DV IN 115  
“DVD” 147  
“DVD Menu” 130, 135  
“DVD Rec. Picture Size”  
L
Labelling 43  
channel 53  
“Language” 130, 135  
“File Search” 96  
“Finalise” 45  
“Finalise Disc” 149  
Finalising 44  
LINE 2 IN 31  
LINE 3/DECODER 30  
“Line Audio Input” 67, 68  
“Line1 Output” 142  
“Line3 Input” 142  
“Line3 Output” 142  
“DVD Rec. Settings” 146  
DVD VIDEO 12  
DVD+R 10, 101  
DVD+RW 10, 101  
DVD-R 10, 101  
DVD-RAM 12  
“FNR” 93  
“Format” 46, 150  
“Format DVD-RW” 148  
Formatting 46  
Freeze Frame 92  
Front panel 166  
Front panel display 40,  
M
DVD-RW 10, 101  
Main sound 80, 146  
Mains Lead 23  
“Make a Playlist” 107  
Manual Clock Set 130,  
E
Easy Setup 27, 151  
Editing 101, 105  
DV Edit 115  
G
“Grid” 70  
Manufacturer Information  
MENU 90  
“Editor” 71  
Enter characters 42  
EPG  
GUIDE Plus+ system 70,  
Menu  
Viewing a list of  
available  
channels 48  
Viewing programmes  
related to a  
DVD’s Menu 90  
Top menu 90  
“Mix” 116  
“Guide Timer Extend” 146  
H
“MNR” 93  
Handling discs 161  
“HDD Rec. Picture Size”  
“Modify” 64, 65  
“Move” 106, 119  
MP3 audio tracks  
copying 97  
managing 98  
MPEG 144  
specific  
category 49  
“Erase” 64, 65, 102, 106,  
“HDD Rec. Settings” 145  
HDMI  
“Erase Album” 98, 124  
Erase all titles 103  
“Erase File” 125  
“Erase Titles” 103  
“Extend Rec.” 58  
“Extend Time” 87  
“Audio(HDMI)” 144  
“HDMI Resolution”  
“My TV” 71  
HDMI OUT 19, 22  
“HQ Setting” 146  
“Hue” 93  
N
“Name” 132  
“New Photomovie” 127  
NICAM 80, 132  
Number buttons 43, 83  
I
i.LINK 164  
Index 54  
“Info” 71  
INPUT SELECT 68, 116  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“Present Time” 130, 135  
“Preview” 106, 119  
Program Edit 118  
Programme Hide 137  
Programme information 50  
“Programme Setting” 131  
“Programme Sort” 133  
Programme Sort 138  
“Progressive Mode” 141  
“Progressive Output” 141  
“Protect” 102  
“Registration Code” 150  
Remaining time 40  
Remote 24, 165  
O
One Touch Dubbing 117,  
Resetting the recorder 151  
Resume Play 91  
One Touch EPG 21  
One Touch Menu 21, 91  
One Touch Play 21, 91  
One Touch Timer 20, 58,  
“RGB” 28, 142  
S
S VIDEO 20  
Original 38, 101  
“Others” 149  
“S Video” 28, 142  
Scan Audio 90  
“Scart Setting” 142  
Scene List 106  
“Schedule” 71  
“Screen Saver” 142  
“Search” 70, 96  
Searching  
“Protect Disc” 44  
Protection  
P
Page mode 38, 66  
Parental Control 91, 147  
Parental Lock 136  
Parts and controls 165  
“Password” 150  
Pause Live TV 94  
“Pause Mode” 142  
PAY-TV 32  
disc 44  
title 102  
Q
Quick guide to disc types  
fast reverse/fast  
forward 92  
locatingthebeginning  
of the title/  
chapter/track 92  
scan audio 90  
Quick Timer 62, 85  
“PAY-TV/CANAL+” 132  
“PB Video Equalizer” 93  
PBC 90  
PDC 88  
Photomovie  
R
Rear panel 167  
REC 36  
Series Recording 60  
“Set Thumbnail” 103  
Set top box controller 15,  
Setting up the GUIDE  
Plus+ system 28  
“Setup” 71  
“Sharpness” 93  
Signal Strength 139  
SimultaneousRecandPlay  
Slideshow 127  
Slow-motion play 92  
SMARTLINK 20  
Sort 38  
REC STOP 36, 117  
Rec. Event 36  
Auto Photomovie  
“Rec. Mode” 62, 85  
“Rec. Mode Adjust” 57,  
“Rec. NR” 63, 86  
“Rec. Settings” 62, 85  
“Rec. Video Equalizer”  
creating 127  
Picture quality 62, 85, 93  
Picture size 62, 85  
“Play Beginning” 91  
Play mode 40  
Playable discs 12  
Playback 12, 90  
DivX video files 90  
fast forward 92  
Recordable discs 10  
“Recording” 145  
Recording 55, 79  
picture adjustment  
fast reverse 92  
freeze frame 92  
instant advance 92  
instant replay 92  
JPEG image files 126  
MP3 audio tracks 99  
Photomovie 129  
resume play 91  
“Stereo1” 116  
“Stereo2” 116  
recording format 10  
recording mode 36,  
Sub sound 80, 146  
SUBTITLE 92  
“Subtitle” 130, 135  
Super VIDEO CD 12  
Synchro Rec 67, 89  
“System” 131  
recording time 36,  
Series Recording 60  
while watching  
another  
scan audio 90  
slow-motion play 92  
Playing status bar 40  
Playlist 38, 101, 105  
Postal Code 27  
programme 36  
Recording time 55, 79  
Region code 13  
,continued  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“TV Guide Page” 133  
TV Pause 94  
TV system 131  
T
Technical Information 139  
Teletext 36, 133  
Thumbnail picture 38  
“Time Search” 96  
TIME/TEXT 40  
TIMER 57, 82, 83, 87, 88  
Timer List 65  
TV t 24, 36  
“TV Type” 27, 140  
TV/DVD 25, 36  
U
“Unfinalise” 46  
Unfinalising 46  
Usable discs 10, 12  
Timer recording  
“Auto Title Erase”  
check/change/cancel  
V
EPG timer setting 59  
GUIDE Plus+ system  
“Video” 28, 140, 142  
VIDEO CD 12  
Video cord 19  
Video input 20  
Video mode 10  
“Video Output” 140  
VIDEO Plus+ 82  
“Video Settings” 93  
“View Album ” 100, 123,  
manual setting 56, 83  
“Rec. Mode Adjust”  
Synchro Rec 67, 89  
VIDEO Plus+ 82  
“Timer Settings” 146  
Title 40  
TITLE LIST 90  
Title List 37, 90  
Sort 38  
“View Image ” 126  
VPS 88  
VR mode 10  
Thumbnail 38  
“Title Name” 102  
Title number 40  
“Title Search” 96  
TOP MENU 90  
“Track Search” 96  
Troubleshooting 152  
“TV Direct Rec.” 20, 36,  
Z
ZWEITON 80  
Sony Corporation Printed in Hungary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp Projector XV Z200U User Manual
Sharp Work Light DL HB9JP8 User Manual
Shopsmith Indoor Furnishings 555970 User Manual
Sigma Camera Lens 595101 User Manual
Silvercrest Clock Radio KH 2289 User Manual
Singer Sewing Machine CE 150 User Manual
Singer Sewing Machine K194 User Manual
Sony CRT Television KV HW21 User Manual
Sunbeam Fan SFH436 UM User Manual
Sunrise Medical Patio Furniture IC 5142 User Manual